JP6692708B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be respectively identified.

  As this type of slot machine, there has been proposed one in which a mode for operating an operating means such as a stop switch is displayed on a game display device (for example, a payout number display device) controlled by a main control unit for controlling the progress of the game. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 5770922

  In the slot machine described in Patent Document 1, no consideration is given to the display content of the game display when the delay control for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period is performed. Therefore, the display on the game display may be changed when the delay control is being performed. In this case, there is a concern that the display on the game display may be changed and the player may not be able to concentrate on the game under delay control. As a result, the interest in the game may be reduced during the delay control.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is a slot capable of improving the interest of a game under delay control by considering display contents of a game display under delay control. Is to provide a machine.

(1) A variable display section capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Derivation operation means (stop switch 8) operated by the player to derive the display result,
Game control means (main control section 41) for controlling the progress of the game,
A plurality of types of predetermined information including information controlled by the game control means and capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation means (display of “1.” in FIG. 19, “b7” in the [about navigation notification] column)) A game display means (game auxiliary display 12) to be displayed,
Delay control means (main control section 41) for performing delay control (freezing) for delaying the progress of the game over the delay period,
And a post-judgment processing means (main control unit 41) for executing post-judgment processing (prize judgment command setting processing) according to the judgment result of whether or not a winning has occurred,
If the delay control is not performed when the derivation operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode displayed on the game display means (NO in S252 or NO in S300 of FIG. 20), the post-determination processing is After the execution, the display of the game display means is changed (the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared after the prize determination command setting process is performed),
When the delay control is performed when the derivation operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode displayed on the game display means (YES in S250 of FIG. 20, or YES in S252 and YES in S300), During the delay period, the display of the operation mode displayed on the game display means is maintained (as shown in FIG. 24, the display of the stop operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display until the freeze ends), The display of the game display means is changed after the delay period has elapsed (as shown in FIG. 24, the display of the game auxiliary display is changed after the freeze ends).

  With such a configuration, since the display of the operation mode displayed on the game display means is maintained during the delay period, the player can confirm the display of the specific operation mode during the delay period. Further, when the delay control is performed, the display of the game display means is not changed during the delay period, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the control other than the delay control may be executed. .. As a result, the interest of the game under delay control is improved.

(2) In the slot machine described in (1) above,
A start effect executing means (sub-control unit 91) capable of executing a start effect (start effect shown in FIG. 24C) that suggests that the specific state (AT) is started during the delay period is further provided.

  With such a configuration, the display of the specific operation mode can be maintained and the start effect can be executed during the delay period. Therefore, attention can be paid to the start effect.

(3) In the slot machine described in (2) above,
An insertion slot (medal insertion section 4) into which a game medium (medal) is inserted,
And an admissible control means for executing admissible control for admitting game media (control for admitting medals),
When the delay control means derives a re-game display result (RT2 transition re-game role) that allows the next unit game to be played without using the game value (credit) based on the insertion of the game medium. The delay control can be executed,
The allowance control means does not execute the allowance control during the delay period, but executes the allowance control after the delay period has elapsed (as shown in FIG. 24A, the medal insertion is not allowed during the freeze. , The medal insertion is allowed after the freeze ends).

  According to such a configuration, since the insertion of the game medium is not permitted during the delay period, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being thrown in as much as possible during the start effect executed during the delay period. Therefore, attention can be paid to the start effect.

(4) In the slot machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
An end effect execution means (sub-control unit 91) capable of executing an end effect (end effect shown in FIG. 25C) indicating that the specific state (AT) is ended during the delay period is further provided.

  With such a configuration, the display of the specific operation mode can be maintained and the end effect can be executed during the delay period. Therefore, attention can be paid to the end effect.

(5) In the slot machine described in (4) above,
An insertion slot (medal insertion section 4) into which a game medium (medal) is inserted,
And an admissible control means for executing admissible control for admitting game media (control for admitting medals),
When the delay control means derives a re-game display result (RT2 transition re-game role) that allows the next unit game to be played without using the game value (credit) based on the insertion of the game medium. The delay control can be executed,
The allowance control means does not execute the allowance control during the delay period, but executes the allowance control after the delay period elapses (as shown in FIG. 25A, the medal insertion is not allowed during the freeze. , The medal insertion is allowed after the freeze ends).

  According to such a configuration, since the insertion of the game medium is not permitted during the delay period, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being thrown in as much as possible during the end effect being executed during the delay period. Therefore, attention can be paid to the end effect.

(6) In the slot machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above,
Prior to deriving the display result, a pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow occurrence of any one of a plurality of special prizes (BB1, BB2, RB) accompanied by the transition of the game state ( Internal lottery of the main control unit 41),
An effect control means (sub-control unit 91) that performs an effect based on the control information transmitted from the game control means,
Further provided is a production display means (liquid crystal display 51) controlled by the production control means to display a plurality of types of predetermined information,
Both the game display means and the effect display means display information capable of specifying the type of special winning that is allowed to be generated by the pre-determination means (in the case of winning BB1, the game auxiliary display device 12). "10." that can specify that BB1 has been won is displayed, and the character image "Aim for Blue 7!" That can specify that BB1 has been won as a special prize promotion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. Is displayed).

  According to such a configuration, since it is possible to display the information capable of specifying the type of the special winning that is allowed to occur in association with the game display means and the effect display means, the game display means and the effect display means. The interest in the game is improved compared to the case where different contents are displayed in and.

(7) In the slot machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above,
A means for displaying a plurality of options (the song selection screen shown in FIG. 26C and the notification mode selection screen shown in FIG. 29C), when the option is selected from the plurality of options. , End display of the plurality of options (as shown in FIGS. 26E and 26F, when the options are determined from the plurality of options, display of the selection screen ends) option display means (sub-control) Part 91),
Control according to the option determined from the plurality of options is executed (as shown in FIGS. 26E and 26F, when the option is determined from the plurality of options, processing according to the option is performed. Control execution means (sub-control unit 91),
When a power failure occurs during the display of the plurality of options, the control execution means performs control according to a predetermined option of the plurality of options when the power is restored (FIG. 27). As shown in (D), (F), and FIGS. 29 (D) and (F), even if any of the plurality of options is selected, when the power failure occurs in the selection screen, A process corresponding to a predetermined option (song A in FIG. 27, chance notification in FIG. 29) is executed).

  According to such a configuration, when a power failure occurs in a state in which the plurality of options are displayed, when the power is restored from the power failure regardless of which of the plurality of options is selected. Since the control according to the predetermined option is executed, it is possible to reduce the processing.

(8) In the slot machine described in (7) above,
The control executed by the control executing means includes control for outputting music (music A to music C shown in FIG. 28),
The option is information that can specify a song (a song name such as “song A” as shown in FIG. 28).

  With such a configuration, a plurality of pieces of information that can specify a song are displayed as options, and a song corresponding to the determined option is output. Therefore, it is possible to increase variations of songs. When a power failure occurs with a plurality of options displayed, regardless of which option is selected from among the plurality of options, when the power is restored from the power failure, a predetermined option is provided. Since the controlled control is executed, the processing can be reduced.

(9) In the slot machine described in (7) above,
The control executed by the control execution means includes control for notifying predetermined information (execution of additional lottery result presentation for notifying the result of additional lottery),
The option is information capable of specifying the notification mode of the predetermined information (notification mode name such as “chance notification” as shown in FIG. 29).

  With such a configuration, a plurality of pieces of information that can specify the notification mode of the predetermined information are displayed as the options, and the predetermined information is notified in the notification mode corresponding to the determined option. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the notification mode. When a power failure occurs with a plurality of options displayed, regardless of which option is selected from among the plurality of options, when the power is restored from the power failure, a predetermined option is provided. Since the controlled control is executed, the processing can be reduced.

(10) In the slot machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
When an award-winning prize (small winning combination) accompanied by the awarding of a gaming-value (medal) occurs, a gaming value giving means for giving a number of gaming values (medals) according to the type of the award winning (small winning combination). When,
Advantageous control means for advantageously controlling the player (BB, RB by the main controller 41, control of the advantageous section),
In the specific period grant total number (total payout number) which is the total number of gaming values granted in the specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of shipment from the factory or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason) Total number of specific advantageous period grants, which is the total number of gaming values granted in the advantageously controlled period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the specific period occupied (number of combined action payouts, number of accessory payouts, number of advantageous interval payouts) ) A specific advantageous period grant ratio (combined combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio), and
And a notifying unit (gaming machine information display 50) for notably specifying the specific advantageous period granting ratio (combined combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio) calculated by the calculating unit,
It is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means (game machine information display 50) (inside the casing 1a, for example, at a position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, a component such as a reel. In general, other boards and the like are not provided, and wiring that connects electronic components to each other does not pass through).

  According to such a configuration, the specific advantage, which is the total number of gaming values granted in the specific period, which is the total number of the gaming values granted in the specific period, of the specific period given to the specific period The specific advantageous period grant ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of period grants, is calculated and notified by the notification means so that it can be specified, so whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market. Can be confirmed. In addition, since the visibility of the notification means is not hindered, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the control is advantageously performed based on the design value.

(11) In the slot machine described in (10) above,
A predetermined total number of grants, which stores the total number of payouts (total number of payouts) for a predetermined period, which is the total number of gaming values granted in a predetermined period (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific period (between 6000 games in the past) by a predetermined number (15) The storage area and the total number of predetermined advantageous period grants (the number of consecutive combination payouts, the combination) which is the total number of gaming values granted in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) of the predetermined period (between 400 games) A predetermined advantageous period total number total storage area for storing the number of articles to be paid out and the number of advantageous sections to be paid out) and a predetermined number (15) or more (ring buffer provided with 15 sets of buffers),
The calculating means stores the total number of grants for a specific period (total payout number in the past 6000 games) in a predetermined number of predetermined total number storage area (ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers) Calculated by summing the number of payouts), the total number of specific advantageous period grants (the number of combined payouts during the past 6000 games, the number of bonus payouts, the number of advantageous section payouts) is a predetermined number of predetermined advantageous period grant total storage areas ( It is characterized in that it is calculated by summing the total number of given predetermined advantageous periods (number of combined payouts, number of accessory payouts, number of advantageous section payouts) stored in a ring buffer provided with 15 sets of buffers.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily calculate the total number of specific period grants and the total number of specific advantageous period grants in the latest specific period.

(12) In the slot machine according to (10) or (11) above,
A storage unit (RAM 41c) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply is stopped,
The storage means has a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data according to the progress of the game is stored, and a second storage area in which data necessary for calculating the specific advantageous period grant ratio is stored. (Non-gaming RAM area),
When the initialization condition is established, the data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized, while the data stored in the second storage area (non-game RAM area) Is characterized by not being initialized.

  According to such a configuration, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to calculate and notify the specific advantageous period grant ratio by taking into account the data before that.

(13) In the slot machine according to any one of (1) to (9) above,
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) in which the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), and a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Advantageous control means for advantageously controlling the player (BB, RB by the main controller 41, control of the advantageous section),
The number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period of the specific number of games, which is the number of games in the specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason) (BB, RB, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section), a calculating means for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio) which is a ratio of the specific advantageous game number (advantageous section game number).
An informing unit (gaming machine information display 50) for informing the specific advantageous period game number ratio (advantageous section ratio) calculated by the calculating unit,
It is configured so as not to interfere with the visibility of the notification means (game machine information display 50) (inside the casing 1a, for example, at a position on the display side of the game machine information display 50, a component such as a reel. In general, other boards and the like are not provided, and wiring that connects electronic components to each other does not pass through).

  According to such a configuration, the specific advantageous period game number ratio, which is the ratio of the specific advantageous game number that is the number of games controlled advantageously in the specific period to the specific game number that is the number of games in the specific period, is calculated. Since the notification is made identifiable by the notification means, it is possible to confirm whether or not the control is advantageously performed based on the predetermined design value even after the product is shipped to the market. In addition, since the visibility of the notification means is not hindered, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the control is advantageously performed based on the design value.

  In addition, in (10) and (13), controlling to be advantageous to the player means a probability that a specific winning is allowed, a probability that a specific winning is generated, and a probability that a privilege advantageous to the player is given. The control for raising the height, the control for notifying the operation mode advantageous to the player, and the like are applicable.

(14) In the slot machine described in (13) above,
The predetermined number of games (BB, RB, the number of games controlled in the advantageous section) within a predetermined period (400 games) obtained by dividing a specific period (between 6000 games in the past) by a predetermined number (15) A predetermined number of advantageous period game number storage areas for storing the number of advantageous period games (the number of advantageous period games) are provided (a ring buffer including 15 sets of buffers),
The calculation means stores a predetermined advantageous period game number (the advantageous period game number between the past 6000 games) stored in a predetermined advantageous period game number storage area (ring buffer including 15 sets of buffers) for a predetermined number. It is characterized in that it is calculated by adding up the number of period games (the number of advantageous section games).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily calculate the number of games for the specific advantageous period in the latest specific period.

(15) In the slot machine according to (13) or (14) above,
A storage unit (RAM 41c) capable of holding the stored contents even when the power supply is stopped,
The storage means stores a first storage area (game RAM area) in which data according to the progress of a game and a second storage area in which data necessary for calculating a specific advantageous period game number ratio is stored. Area (non-gaming RAM area),
The data stored in the first storage area (game RAM area) is initialized when the initialization condition (such as the setting change operation is performed) is satisfied, while the second storage area is initialized. The data stored in the (non-gaming RAM area) is not initialized.

  According to such a configuration, even when the initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to calculate and notify the number of games for the specific advantageous period in consideration of the data before that.

(16) In the slot machine according to any one of (10) to (15) above,
A game control means (main control section 41) for controlling the game,
A game control board (game control board 40) on which the game control means is mounted,
The game control board is housed, and a board case (board case 120a) that cannot be opened without leaving a trace is provided.
The notification means (game machine information display 50) is mounted on the game control board (game control board 40), and the notification content can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is accommodated in the board case. (In the substrate case 120a, a seal sticker, an entry portion for entering the person who opens the seal, a label for management information and the like, an attachment portion to which the label is attached, a display portion for printing and engraving management information, a heat dissipation hole , Parts such as a fan for heat dissipation are provided so as to avoid the position on the display side of the gaming machine information display device 50).

  According to such a configuration, the notification means is mounted on the game control board, and the notification content can be confirmed in a state where the game control board is accommodated in the unopenable board case without leaving a trace. It is possible to prevent the notification means from being improperly modified.

  The present invention may have only the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention specifying matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be one.

FIG. 38 is a front view of the slot machine of the embodiment to which the present invention is applied. It is a perspective view showing an internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a block diagram showing a configuration of a slot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a main control part. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state which is a lottery target among the lottery targets in an internal lottery about a re-play, a setting difference, the presence or absence of AT lottery, and whether it becomes a navigation target. Regarding the lottery target in the internal lottery, which is the lottery target related to the control of the AT among the lottery target roles related to the small combination and the special role, the gaming state, the setting difference, the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and the navigation target It is a figure for explaining whether or not it becomes. Regarding the lottery target combination in the internal lottery that is not related to AT control among the lottery target combinations related to the small role and the special role, the game state, the setting difference and the presence / absence of the AT lottery, and the navigation target It is a figure for explaining whether or not it becomes. It is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state. It is a figure showing an outline of a game state. It is a figure for explaining a symbol combination stopped according to a stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining a symbol combination stopped according to a stop operation mode by a lottery target combination. It is a figure showing the winning number of the special winning combination, the winning number for transmission, and the navigation number in the first internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the winning numbers, the winning numbers for transmission, and the navigation numbers of the small winning combination and the re-game combination in the second internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of internal winning command setting processing which a main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the navigation number notified by a main control part by navigation notification. 7 is a flowchart showing the control content of a push-order command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game auxiliary indicator. It is a figure which shows the alert aspect by a navigation alert. It is a flow chart which shows the contents of control of processing at the end of the game which the main control part performs. It is a figure which shows the alert aspect of the number of payouts. It is a flow chart showing the contents of control of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit. It is a figure for explaining switching timing of a display mode of a game auxiliary indicator in a game when freeze is not executed. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which a main control part switches the lighting mode of a game auxiliary indicator according to a game progress etc. at the time of AT start and a freeze is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating the timing which a main control part switches the lighting mode of a game auxiliary indicator according to a game progress etc. at the time of AT end and a freeze is performed. It is a figure for demonstrating when a music selection screen is displayed when an electric power interruption does not generate | occur | produce. It is a figure for explaining a case where an electric power failure occurs when a music selection screen is displayed. It is a figure for demonstrating the case where a power failure generate | occur | produced after the music was determined in the music selection screen. It is a figure for explaining a case where a notice mode selection screen is displayed. 9 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which the stop operation enabling condition is satisfied in the reel rotation processing. 9 is a timing chart for explaining the timing at which the stop operation enabling condition is satisfied in the reel rotation processing. 8 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of establishment of a reel rotation error in the reel rotation processing. 7 is a timing chart for explaining a timing at which a stop operation enabling condition is satisfied in a reel rotation process after recovery from power failure. It is a figure which shows the notification aspect by error notification. It is a figure for demonstrating the switching timing of the display mode of a game auxiliary display before and after power failure. It is a figure for explaining switching timing of a display mode of a game auxiliary indicator at the time of an error occurrence. It is a figure for explaining the flow of control about control about change of the display mode of a game auxiliary indicator. FIG. 27 shows signals input / output between the slot machine and the test device. FIG. 16 is a front view of the housing showing the internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure showing a display example of a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the totaling method of the data displayed on a gaming machine information display. It is a figure which shows the data extracted in an extraction process. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a notification mode by navigation notification in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modifications 1 and 2 of the notification aspect by navigation notification. It is a timing chart which shows the selection situation of the excitation pattern of the reel motor in control of a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of control about the modification of the control regarding the change of the display mode of a game auxiliary indicator.

  Modes for carrying out a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on Examples.

[Overall structure of slot machine]
A first embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having a front opening, and a front door 1b pivotally supported at a side end of the housing 1a. There is.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C, 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are arranged. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R have a casing 1a such that three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on each reel 2 can be seen from a see-through window 3 provided on a front door 1b. Is located inside.

  FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reels. As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", " BAR, watermelon, cherry a, cherry b, bell, replay a, replay b, plum are identified in a predetermined order in a predetermined order. 21 are drawn each. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in upper, middle, and lower three tiers in the see-through window 3 provided substantially in the center of the front door 1b.

  Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by a reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) provided correspondingly, and the design of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R changes continuously on the see-through window 3. Will be displayed. Further, by stopping the rotation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed as the display result on the transparent window 3.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect reference positions for the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the rear surface ( 4) is provided. The reel LED 55 is composed of 12 LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and irradiates each symbol independently. Here, a device including the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4) and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R is also referred to as a reel unit 2. Further, hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is necessary to distinguish them. Further, the reel 2L may be called a left reel, the reel 2C may be called a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be called a right reel. Further, an operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  As shown in FIG. 1, a display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51 is arranged at the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel which is transparent in the state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and through the transparent area 51b and the transparent window 3 corresponding to the transparent window 3 of the display area 51a. Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  At the lower right of the liquid crystal display 51, a medal insertion portion 4 into which medals can be inserted is provided, and at the lower part of the front door 1b, a medal payout opening 9 and speakers 53 and 54 for paying out medals are provided. There is. Further, on the front door 1b, as an example of the operating means, among the bet number of the predetermined number determined according to the gaming state within the range of the credit (the number of medals stored as the gaming value owned by the player) The MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting the maximum bet number, the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet number are settled (the medals used for setting the credit and the bet number are returned. Adjustment switch 10, which is operated when the game is started, the start switch 7 which is operated when the game is started, and the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R which are operated when the rotations of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R are stopped, respectively. The effect switch 56 used for is provided. In addition, below, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is also collectively called the stop switch 8.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet number by the operation of the MAXBET switch 6 is valid. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R (FIGS. 7A and 7B) that notify by lighting that the stop operation of the reels by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are effective. 4) are provided respectively. Inside the effect switch 56, there is provided an effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

  On the left side of the MAXBET switch 6, a game display section 13 is provided. On the game display unit 13, a credit display unit 11 for displaying the number of medals stored as credits, a game auxiliary display unit 12 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize, and a bet number of 1 1BETLED 14 for notifying that the number of bets has been set, 2BETLED 15 for notifying that the number of bets has been set to 2, 3BETLED 16 for notifying that the number of bets has been set to 3, and an insertion request for notifying that a medal can be inserted LED 17 and start valid LED 18 for informing that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, wait (state in which waiting for reel start to start because a certain period has not elapsed since the start of the previous game) In-wait LED 19 for notifying that the replay is in progress, LE being replayed for notifying that the replay game is in progress 20 is provided. The game auxiliary display 12 displays not only the number of medals but also an error code indicating the content when an error occurs, information that can identify the reel stop order by a navigation notification to be described later, and the like. In addition, various LEDs such as the 1-BET LED 14 provided on the game display unit 13 notify various information by lighting.

[Internal structure of slot machine 1]
The internal structure of the slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. Inside the front door 1b, the reset switch 23, the set value display 24, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the flow passage switching solenoid 30, the inserted medal sensor 31, the medal selector 29, the open state of the front door 1b. A door opening detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting is provided.

  Here, the reset switch 23 is a switch that detects a reset operation for canceling an error state described later and a hit state described later by a predetermined key operation. The set value display 24 displays the set value at that time while changing the set value or confirming the set value, which will be described later. The stop switch 36a is a switch for selecting valid / invalid of a stop function for controlling a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at a predetermined timing. The automatic settlement switch 36b is for selecting valid / invalid of the automatic settlement function for controlling the automatic settlement process (the process of settlement (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at a predetermined timing. Switch. The flow path switching solenoid 30 selectively selects the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 to either the hopper tank 34a side or the medal payout outlet 9 side, which will be described later, provided inside the housing 1a. It is a device for switching. The inserted medal sensor 31 is a sensor that detects medals that have been inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 and have flowed down to the hopper tank 34a side. The medal selector 29 is provided with an insertion opening sensor 26 that detects the insertion of a foreign object on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31.

  Inside the casing 1a, there are a reel unit 2, an external output substrate 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4) for paying out the stored medals from the medal payout outlet 9 and a payout sensor 34c (see FIG. 4) for detecting the medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b. A power supply box 100 is provided.

  An overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided on the side of the hopper unit 34. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full tank sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full is provided.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100, a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stopped state in normal times, and a setting key switch 37 in a setting change state A reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a set value of a winning probability (ball-out rate) of an internal lottery described later, and a power switch 39 operated when turning the power on / off are provided. ..

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation carried by a clerk or the like. Therefore, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 provided on the front surface of the power supply box 100 can be operated only by a person such as a store clerk who has the key, and cannot be operated by the player. Is becoming The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires the key operation after opening the front door 1b by the key operation, only the clerk of the game hall who has the key to operate the setting key switch 37 is required. It is possible to operate.

[Various boards provided in the slot machine 1]
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game control board 40 controls the game state, and the effect control board 90 causes the game state. The effect according to is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates drive power for the electric components that form the slot machine 1, and supplies the drive power to each unit.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with an AC100V power supply from the outside, and a DC voltage necessary for driving the electric components of the slot machine 1 is generated from the AC100V power supply, and the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are generated. To be supplied to. The power supply board 101 is connected to the hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power supply switch 39.

  On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the insertion medal sensor 31, and the door opening described above. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full tank sensor 35a, setting key switch 37, and reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input to the game control board 40. Further, on the game control board 40, the above-mentioned credit indicator 11, game auxiliary indicator 12, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, wait LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, left. , Middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, set value display 24, flow path switching solenoid 30, and reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are connected. Further, the hopper motor 34b described above is connected to the game control board 40 via the power supply board 101. The electric parts connected to the game control board 40 are driven under the control of a main control unit 41, which will be described later, mounted on the game control board 40.

  Further, in a state where the game control board 40 is attached at a predetermined position inside the housing 1a, a gaming machine information display including a 7-segment display is provided on the lower portion of the front side (player side) of the game control board 40. The container 50 is arranged (see FIG. 39). The gaming machine information display 50 allows display contents to be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a, and is aggregated by the main control unit 41 described later. The clerk or the like can recognize the information such as the advantageous section ratio in the slot machine 1 displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  On the game control board 40, a main control section 41 that performs processing relating to the progress of the game, a control clock generation circuit 42 that generates a control clock, a random number clock generation circuit 43 that generates a random number clock, and a game control board. A switch detection circuit 44 that transmits a detection signal input from switches that are directly or indirectly connected to 40 to a main control unit 41, and a motor that transmits various signals output from the main control unit 41 to each electric component. A drive circuit 45, a solenoid drive circuit 46, an LED drive circuit 47, an interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs various signals to the main control unit 41 in a predetermined state, and a reset circuit 49 are mounted.

  The main control section 41 directly or indirectly controls each section of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40. The motor drive circuit 45 transmits the motor drive signal (phase signal of the stepping motor) output from the main controller 41 to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. The solenoid drive circuit 46 transmits the solenoid drive signal output from the main controller 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30. The LED drive circuit 47 transmits the LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to various indicators and LEDs connected to the game control board 40. When the power failure detection circuit 48 monitors the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 and detects a voltage drop, it outputs a voltage drop signal to that effect to the main controller 41. The reset circuit 49 gives a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in a state where the power supply is unstable, such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, and the like.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, fixed data read operation, variable data write operation, variable data read operation, reception operation, transmission operation, etc. are also performed.

  Here, the fixed data read operation is an operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b. The fluctuation data writing operation is an operation in which the CPU 41a writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 41c and temporarily stores it. The fluctuation data reading operation is an operation in which the CPU 41a reads various kinds of fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. The reception operation is an operation in which the CPU 41a receives an input of various signals from outside the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, and the like. The transmission operation is an operation in which the CPU 41a outputs various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area or the like for game control. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the content of the RAM 41c is saved for a predetermined period.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted only in one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. In the present embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal. However, the command is transmitted via the serial communication circuit 512. The sub-control unit 91 may be configured to transmit a command, that is, the command may be transmitted as a serial signal.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly loops the processing according to the control state until the detection state of the various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes as the main processing, and responds to the change of the detection state of the various switches. Execute the process of shifting in stages. Further, the main control unit 41 executes a timer interrupt process (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment). The execution interval of the timer interrupt process (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time when the process that repeats according to the control state in the main process completes and the execution time of the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, between the present time and the next timer interrupt process (main), the process that repeats according to the control state must be completed at least once.

  The effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and the detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. Further, production devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, a production effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, a reel LED 55, etc. are connected, and these production devices are controlled by a sub-control unit 91, which will be described later, mounted on the production control board 90. It is designed to be driven based on.

  In the present embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. However, in addition to the sub control unit 91, an output control unit that directly controls the output of the production device is mounted on the production control substrate 90 or another substrate, and the sub control unit 91 is based on the command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the rendering device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the rendering device based on the output pattern determined by the sub control unit 91. Both the sub control unit 91 and the output control unit may control the rendering device. Output control may be performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect device, but the effect device is not limited to these, and, for example, a mechanically driven display. A device or a mechanically driven role object may be applied as the production device.

  The production control board 90, a sub-control unit 91 that controls production, a display control circuit 92, LED drive circuits 93a to 93e, a voice output circuit 94, a reset circuit 95, a switch detection circuit 96, and a timepiece device. 97, the power failure detection circuit 98, and other circuits are mounted.

  Here, the display control circuit 92 controls the display of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. The LED drive circuits 93a to 93e control the drive of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55. The audio output circuit controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54. The reset circuit 95 gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input for a predetermined time. The switch detection circuit 96 detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90. The clock device 97 outputs time information including date information and time information. The power failure detection circuit 98 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1, and when detecting a voltage drop, outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the sub CPU 91a. The effect control board 90 is configured by a microcomputer including a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d.

  The sub CPU 91a receives the command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect according to a program for effect control stored in the ROM 91b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. It directly or indirectly controls each part of the control circuit.

  Like the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 has an interrupt function, generates an interrupt when a command is received from the main control unit 41, and acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Execute the command reception interrupt process to store in the buffer. Further, the sub-control unit 91 generates an interrupt each time the number of inputs of the system clock reaches a fixed number, that is, at a fixed time interval (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 interrupts the process even if the timer interrupt process (sub) is being executed when the interrupt is generated based on the reception of the command. The command reception interrupt process is executed at 1, and the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority even if the interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously. Further, the backup power supply is also supplied to the sub control unit 91 at the time of power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power supply is supplied.

  Each time the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt process (main), the main control unit 41 performs a power failure determination process for determining whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 48 is detected. When it is determined that the drop signal is detected, the power interruption process (main) for setting the data for determining whether the data of the RAM 41c is normal at the time of the next recovery is executed.

  Then, the main control unit 41 restores the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, provided that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM abnormality error code is set in the register, the RAM abnormality error state is controlled, and the progress of the game is disabled.

  The error state must be released until a normal error state is released by a reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23) and the above-mentioned setting change state and a new set value is set. And a special error condition that does not exist. The RAM abnormal error state is a special error state. Once the RAM abnormal error state is controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, the RAM abnormal error state is shifted to the setting change state and is not released until a new set value is set.

  The sub control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power failure detection circuit 98 is detected in the timer interrupt process (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected, At the time of next recovery, the power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 restores the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c on condition that the data of the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation. However, when the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, the RAM 91c is only initialized and the execution of the effect is not disabled.

  Even if the sub-control unit 91 determines that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of its activation, if the sub-control unit 91 receives a setting command described later from the main control unit 41 indicating that the setting has been changed, the sub-control unit 91 is activated. The RAM 91c is also initialized when neither a later-described restoration command nor a setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been restored is received even after a lapse of a certain time thereafter. Also in this case, the RAM 91c is only initialized, and execution of the effect is not disabled.

[About setting value]
In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. Specifically, the payout rate of medals can be changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in a lottery such as an internal lottery, which will be described later, which affects the degree of advantage for the player. The set value is made up of 6 levels from 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the smaller the value is in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage decreases in stages.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the setting key switch 37 and then turn on the slot machine 1. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed as a display value on the setting value display 24, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Change to change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated by 1 (when the setting value 6 is further operated, it is changed to the setting value 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is set as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the confirmed display value (setting value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the game is allowed to proceed. Further, since the main control unit 41 initializes the RAM 41c with the transition to the setting change state, the operation of changing the set value also functions as an operation of initializing the control state of the main control unit 41. Will be done.

  Further, in order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on after the number of bets has not been set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, so that the setting value is confirmed. In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot proceed, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state ends, and the state in which the game can proceed is restored.

[Game flow]
The slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a predetermined number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state, and the game is performed on the condition that the specified number of bets has been set according to the gaming state. Can be started. The number of bets is set by inserting medals from the medal inserting unit 4 or using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When the maximum number of medals has been inserted among the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated when the specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, and the operation of the start switch 7 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. .. When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R continuously change. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3. When all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay lines (in the case of the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. It will be a prize if a combination of symbols called a winning combination is completed on the winning line. The winning combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  Here, in the present embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started to rotate, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop thereof is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the second stop reel is called the second stop reel, the stop is called the second stop, the third stop reel is called the third stop reel, and the stop is the third stop. Alternatively, it is called a final stop.

  The winning line is a line set to determine whether the combination of symbols displayed on the transparent window 3 of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is a combination of winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the pay line LN, which is set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the middle of the reel 2L, the middle of the reel 2C, and the middle of the reel 2R, that is, the middle, is the winning line. It is set. In this embodiment, only one pay line is applied, but a plurality of pay lines may be applied.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the winning line LN has a combination of symbols constituting the winning line, the invalid lines LM1 to 4 are set separately from the winning line LN. The ineffective lines LM1 to LM4 are not those in which the winning is determined by the combination of the symbols arranged in the ineffective lines LM1 to LM4, and the ineffective lines are formed when the combinations of the symbols constituting a specific winning are aligned in the winning line LN. By having a configuration in which a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that becomes a prize when aligned on the pay line LN in any of LM1 to 4 is arranged, a symbol forming a specific prize on the pay line LN This makes it easy to recognize that the combinations are complete.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the upper stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 and the lower stage of the reel 2L which are set across the symbols arranged in the horizontal direction in the upper stage. , The lower stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower stage, the upper stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the lower stage of the reel 2R, that is, the right downward line. 4 types of invalid line LM3 set across the symbols, the invalid line LM3 set below the reel 2L, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R. Has been defined as.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as a winning combination, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "bell-watermelon-cherry b") defined as a winning combination on the winning line LN is prepared, the winning combination is made and the predetermined symbol is obtained. When the combinations are aligned, a combination of symbols (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”) that is an index that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination in any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 is aligned, and thus the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. Includes a winning combination that can be seen as a winning combination. In the following, when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned on the pay line LN, a symbol combination that is aligned on any of the ineffective lines LM1 to LM4 is referred to as an index symbol combination, and a symbol symbol combination is configured. The design is called an index design.

  The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be broadly divided into small combinations involving payout of medals and the next game that can be started without the need to set the bet number. There are a game combination and a special combination accompanied by a transition to a game state advantageous to the player. Below, the small winning combination and the re-playing combination are collectively called a general winning combination. In order for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the winning combination in the RAM 41c. Of the winning flags of each of these winning combinations, the winning flags of the small winning combination and the re-playing winning combination are valid only in the game in which the flags are set, and are invalid in the next game, but the winning flags of the special winning combination are The flag is valid until the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the allowed combinations is prepared. That is, once the winning flag of a special winning combination is won, even if the combination of winning combinations allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and carried over to the next game. Becomes

  Then, all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped to complete one game, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a winning combination) on the pay line is a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R. When the game is stopped, a prize is generated, and the number of medals determined according to the prize is given to the player and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, on the pay line, when the symbol combination accompanied by the transition of the game state is stopped as the display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the game state is shifted to the combination of the symbols.

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected while the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and the game ends when all the reels stop. Also, the control of one unit for executing the game (game control) starts when all the controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all the controls associated with the end of the game are completed. finish.

  In this embodiment, the configuration using three reels is illustrated, but the configuration using only one reel, the configuration using two reels, and the configuration using four or more reels may be used. In the configuration using two or more reels, the winning determination may be made based on the combination of the display results derived to all the two or more reels. Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display device is configured by a physical reel, but the variable display device may be configured by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated to start changing the symbols, any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated. At this time, the rotation of the reels corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped and the symbols are stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (millisecond).

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and the symbols for 80 × 21 (the number of symbol frames per reel) = 1680 frames are changed, so that a maximum of 4 symbols are drawn in 190 ms. It will be possible. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols that are displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols that are four frames ahead of the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  Therefore, for example, when the symbols displayed in the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is used as a reference, the symbols up to four frames ahead Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, in each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch when any of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated It is possible to display symbols arranged within 5 frames including the symbol on the pay line.

[Game control processing]
The main control unit 41 performs a game control process to control one game. In the game control process, first, a BET process for setting a bet number, credit settlement, and bet settlement. When the start switch 7 is operated after setting the bet number, a random number value is extracted from a predetermined random number circuit, and based on the extracted random number value, it is determined whether or not the generation of a prize is allowed (internal lottery). The internal lottery process is performed. When the internal lottery process is completed, the reel rotation process is performed. In the reel rotation processing, the stop switches 8L to 8R are activated after the reels 2L to 2R are started to rotate on condition that a predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed from the start of reel rotation in the previous game. The rotation of the reel is stopped according to the stop operation. In the reel rotation process, in order to execute a freeze for delaying the progress of the game for a predetermined period (delaying the activation of the stop operation of each of the stop switches 8L to 8R) when a predetermined freeze condition is satisfied. After executing the freeze process, the operation to the stop switches 8L to 8R is validated to shift to the normal game. Here, the freeze is a state in which the operation of advancing the game is not accepted (or delayed). The operations for advancing the normal game are bet operations (operations on the MAXBET switch 6), lever-on operations (operations on the start switch 7), and reel stop operations. In other words, during the freeze, the game does not proceed even if the player performs any operation (for example, the bet number is not set even if the bet operation is performed, and the reel is stopped even if the start switch 7 is operated. The reel is not rotated while the state is maintained).

  When the reels 2L to 2R are stopped and the reel rotation process is completed, a winning determination process for determining whether or not a winning or the like has occurred is performed based on the symbol combination on the winning line. When the winning determination process ends, a payout process is performed. In the payout process, payout of medals or credit addition according to the occurrence of a prize, various processes not related to the prize (for example, a process related to the bonus end control by counting the number of medals paid out in the bonus, and a winning without carry-over) Flags (such as winning flags for small wins / re-game wins, etc.) are deleted.

  When the payout processing ends, the game end processing is performed. In the game end processing, processing such as setting a game state for the next game is executed. As a result, the game control process for one game ends, and the game control process for the next one game starts.

[Internal lottery]
Next, the internal lottery of this embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, before the display result of all reels 2L, 2C, 2R is derived by the main control unit 41, whether or not the winning of each of the above-mentioned winning combinations is permitted (specifically, the start switch 7 Is detected). In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number value for the internal lottery (an integer of 0 to 65535) is acquired. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, according to the numerical data stored in the lottery work for each winning combination determined according to the gaming state and the number of judgment values of each winning combination determined according to the current gaming state, the bet number and the set value. It is determined whether or not the winning is allowed.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined corresponding to the winning combination of the internal lottery, the current game state and the set value is sequentially applied to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). It is determined that the winning combination has been won when the addition is performed and the result of the addition overflows. Therefore, the winning combination is won with a probability (the number of judgment values / 65536) according to the size of the number of judgment values.

  Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, navigator notification, command creation, reel 2L, 2C, 2R stop control, and the like.

  Further, when it is determined that one of the winning combinations is won, a winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined based on the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storing work allocated to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a 2-byte storage area, the upper byte of which is assigned as the special combination storing work in which the winning flag of the special combination is set, and the lower byte is the general combination winning combination. It is assigned as a general role storing work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special role is won, the winning flag of the special role indicating that the special role has been won is set in the special role storing work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. A winning flag of a general role indicating that is set in the general role storing work. If none of the winning combinations and combinations of winning combinations are won, the special winning combination storing work and the general winning combination storing work are cleared.

  Further, in the internal lottery, whether or not to control the AT is determined in a state where the AT is not controlled, which will be described later, and whether or not the remaining game number of the AT is to be added in the state where the AT is controlled. It is determined. When the AT is won by the internal lottery, the AT is controlled thereafter, and when the addition of the number of remaining games of the AT is won, the number of won games is added to the number of remaining games of the AT.

[Stop control]
Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. In the reel rotation processing, the main control unit 41, when the reel starts to rotate, and when the reel is stopped and there is still a reel still spinning, the winning number and the table index stored in the ROM 41b, A stop control table is created for each spinning reel by referring to the table creation data. Then, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the spinning reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the reference stop control table is slipped. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is set as the number of sliding symbols, and it is possible to pull in a maximum of 4 symbols and stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. That is, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In other words, it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, so it is possible to pull in a maximum of four symbols and stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. Including the operation position, it is possible to specify the stop position of the symbol from the range of maximum 5 symbols.

  In the present embodiment, when one of the winning combinations has been won, when the stop operation is performed, it is possible to stop all the winning combinations within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the pay line. If possible, the control is performed to stop them in alignment, and the winning combination that is not won is controlled to be stopped in the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames without being aligned. If the special role and the small role are simultaneously won, such as when the small role is won while the special role has been carried over from the previous game, the following operation is performed when the stop operation is performed. To be done. If it is possible to align and stop the winning combinations in the winning range of up to 4 frames on the pay line, control is performed to align and stop them. If you can't pull in a small winning combination with a maximum draw-in range of 4 frames on the payline, if you can stop all the special winning combinations with a maximum drawing-in range of 4 draws on the winning line , A control for aligning and stopping this is performed. The winning combination that is not won is controlled to stop without aligning within the pull-in range of 4 frames. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the small winning combination on the winning line is prioritized over the special winning role, and the special winning combination can be won only when the small winning combination cannot be drawn. In addition, when a special combination and a small combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the small combination is drawn in, and the small combination is not aligned with the special combination on the pay line. When a special role and a small role are won at the same time, the control of aligning the special role on the winning line is given priority over the small role, and the small role is placed on the winning line only when the special role cannot be drawn. Alignment control may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special game and the re-game combination are simultaneously won, such as when the special game is carried over from the previous game and the re-game combination is won, the stop operation is performed. At this time, control is performed to align and stop the symbols of the re-play combination within the pull-in range of up to 4 frames on the pay line. The symbols that make up the re-gaming combination or the symbols that make up the re-gaming combination that wins at the same time are within 5 symbols for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, that is, because they are arranged at intervals of 4 frames or less. It is possible to stop the symbols constituting the re-game combination in the retracted range without fail at any position. Therefore, when the special combination and the re-gaming combination are simultaneously elected, the re-gaming combination is always won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. That is, in such a case, the control of aligning the re-gaming combination on the pay line is prioritized over the special combination, and the re-gaming combination is always won. Further, when the special combination and the re-game combination can be drawn in at the same time, only the re-play combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the pay line at the same time as the re-play combination.

  In the present embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using the stop control table that can specify the number of sliding pieces for each timing when the stop operation is performed, but the stop control configuration is not limited to this. Absent. For example, a configuration in which a stop position is specified from a stop position table that can specify a stoppable position and stop control for stopping the reel at the specified stop position is performed, and a stop operation is performed without using the stop control table or the stop position table. At which the stop position that can be stopped is searched and specified and the reel is stopped at the specified stop position. Stop control using the stop control table, stop control using the stop position table, stop control A configuration in which stop control is performed by searching and specifying a stop position that can be stopped without using a table or a stop position table, or a configuration in which the stop control table or the stop position table is partially changed to perform stop control may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the main control section 41 measures the game time, which is the time elapsed from the start of the rotation of the reel, that is, the time elapsed each time the rotation of the reel is started, after the start of the game. There is. If the specified time has elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, no weight is generated and the reel rotation for the game in the game is started at that time. On the other hand, if the specified time has not elapsed since the reel rotation start time of the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started when the specified time is reached. Specifically, after the end of one game, a prescribed number of bets is set by inserting medals, etc., and when the game start operation is performed with the game start operation enabled, the previous game If the game time when the timing is started from the reel rotation start time is equal to or longer than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), the reel rotation for the game in the game is started at that time. On the other hand, when the game start operation is performed in a state where the specified number of bets is set by inserting medals after the end of one game and the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation start of the previous game is started. If the game time that started timing from the time is less than the specified time, wait is generated and the game starts when the reel rotation of the previous game starts. When it reaches, the reel starts to rotate.

[About various commands]
Next, a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In this embodiment, the main control unit 41 instructs the sub-control unit 91 to input a number-of-coins command, a credit command, a game state command, an AT state command, an internal winning command, a push order command, a reel acceleration information command, and an acceleration completion command. , Stop operation command, sliding frame number command, stop command, game end command, AT start freeze command, AT end freeze command, prize determination command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command, error command, Sends multiple types of commands including return commands, setting commands, setting confirmation commands, and door commands. These commands consist of 1-byte type data indicating the type of command and 1-byte extension data indicating the contents of the command, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of command from the type data.

  The inserted number command is a command that can specify the number of inserted medals, that is, the number of medals used to set the bet number, and is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, when power is restored. , Or when a medal is inserted in a state where the bet number of the prescribed number is not set, or when the bet number is set by operating the MAXBET switch 6. Further, since the thrown-in command is transmitted when the bet-number setting operation is performed, it is possible to specify that the bet-number setting operation is performed by receiving the thrown-number command.

  The credit command is a command that can specify the number of medals stored as credits, is a state from the end of the game (after setting change) to the start of the game, and in a state in which a specified number of bets is set, Sent when a medal is inserted and credits are added.

  The game state command is a command that can specify the game state of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The AT state command is a command capable of specifying whether the game is in AT or not, which will be described later, the number of remaining games in the AT, etc., and is transmitted after the game state command when the game starts.

  The internal winning command is a command capable of specifying the internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the AT state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command capable of specifying whether or not a special role is won, and a second internal winning command capable of specifying whether or not a general role is won, After the first internal winning command is sent, the second internal winning command is sent.

  The push order command is a command that can specify the stop order, and is when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and when the reels are stopped. It is sent after the stop command is sent each time control is performed. In addition, in a game in which navigation notification described below is executed, a push order command that can specify a stop order that is advantageous for the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which navigation notification described below is not executed, an advantageous stop Until the order is confirmed, a push order command that cannot identify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted, and from the time when the favorable stop order is determined, a push order command that can identify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted. It

  Since the game state command, the AT state command, and the internal winning command are transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started, by receiving these commands, the start switch 7 is operated and the game is started. Can be specified.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game.

  The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reels accompanying the start of the game has been completed, and after starting the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R when the game is started, first of all Sent when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate at a constant speed.

  The stop operation command is a command that can specify the reel to be stopped, which is the left reel, the center reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel. Sent every time the accompanying stop control is performed.

  The sliding frame number command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the number of sliding frames to move from the stop operation of the corresponding reel to the stop. That is, every time stop control is performed in accordance with the stop operation of each reel, it is transmitted after the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command that can specify the reel to be stopped, that is, the left reel, the center reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and the stop control accompanying the stop operation of each reel. Is transmitted after each corresponding slide frame number command is transmitted.

  The stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and is accompanied by the stop operation of each reel. Since it is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, by receiving these commands, it is possible to specify that one of the reels has been stopped and the reel to be stopped.

  The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player depresses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

  The AT start freeze command is a command that can specify the start of the freeze that is executed when the process shifts from RT1 to RT2 after the start of AT control described later, and the freeze period. The AT start freeze command is transmitted during the game end processing when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The AT end freeze command is a command that can specify the start of a freeze executed when ending the control of an AT, which will be described later, and the period of the freeze. The AT end freeze command is transmitted during the game end process when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  The prize determination command is a command that can specify the presence or absence of a prize, a combination of symbols arranged on the prize line LN, the type of the prize, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, so that the player stops the third stop reel. It is when the stop switch is pressed down and released, which is transmitted after the game end command is transmitted.

  The game end command and the winning determination command are both transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch. Therefore, by receiving these commands, It is possible to specify that all the operations necessary for advancing one game have ended.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of the payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by payment of a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the bet number) is started. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and settlement of credits is completed.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and when one game is completed and the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) has elapsed without setting the bet number, the credit is set. Sent after the payout of medals by the settlement of the medals (including medals used for setting the bet number) is completed and the payout end command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or cancellation of the stop state, and when the ending production waiting time has elapsed after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted, and the reset operation is performed. When the stopped state is released, a stopped command indicating the release of the stopped state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or cancellation of an error condition and the type of error condition. When an error is determined and the error condition is controlled, the error command indicating the occurrence of the error condition and its type is sent and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is released, an error command indicating release of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 returns to the control state before the power failure at the startup.

  The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change.When the setting change state is entered, the setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted, and when the setting change state ends. A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. Further, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the setting start. ..

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation command indicating the setting confirmation start is transmitted, and when the setting confirmation state ends, the setting confirmation end is set. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, the on (open state) / off (closed state), and at power-on, at the end of one game (after the end of the game, the bet number of the next game). Before the setting can be started) and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  These commands are generated in the main process or the timer interrupt process (main), temporarily stored in the command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the command transmission process of the timer interrupt process (main).

[Regarding control of effect executed by sub control unit 91]
Next, the control of the production performed by the sub control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the production control board 90 will be described. The sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process when receiving a command from the main control unit 41. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub control unit 91 is the earliest. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like are referred to based on the control content registered in the control pattern table. Performs output control of various performance devices. In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED 55, and the like, for each of the plurality of types of effect patterns, Control patterns of these effect devices are registered. When receiving the command, the sub control unit 91 selects a control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command from the control patterns registered in the control pattern table corresponding to the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game. The output control of the effect device is performed based on the control pattern. As a result, an effect corresponding to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  When a new command is received during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. The effect based on the control pattern is executed. That is, even if the effect is not completed to the end, if a new command is received, the effect that was being executed is canceled and a new command is received unless the received new command is a command that triggers a new effect. The effect based on the command will be executed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b, and when the sub-control unit 91 receives the internal winning command, the sub control unit 91 creates the effect table according to the internal lottery result indicated by the internal winning command. By referring to the registered selection rate, one of the effect patterns is selected from a plurality of types of effect patterns according to the selected rate. The sub control unit 91 sets the selected effect pattern in the RAM 91c as an effect pattern of the game. That is, even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected depending on the effect pattern selected when the internal winning command is received, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

[About the lottery target]
FIG. 6 to FIG. 8 are diagrams for explaining the lottery target combination in the internal lottery by the main control unit 41, the game state that is the lottery target, the setting difference and the presence or absence of the AT lottery, and whether or not it is the navigation target. is there.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 6 to FIG. 8, a combination of lottery target combinations read as a lottery target combination (including AT) for each game state in the internal lottery will be described.

  In the present embodiment, as the lottery target combination to be the target of the internal lottery, the lottery target combination relating to the re-game combination (see FIG. 6) and the lottery target combination relating to the small combination and the special combination, which are related to the control of the AT ( (See FIG. 7), a lottery target combination relating to a small combination and a special combination, which is not related to AT control (see FIG. 8), is determined in advance, and each lottery target combination is determined according to the game state. The number of values is set. The denominator of the number of determination values is set to “65536” in association with the random number for the internal lottery (integer of 0 to 65535). Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination for which "300" is set as the determination value is 300/65536. Further, for each lottery target combination, when the lottery target is a lottery target according to the game state, a number of determination values of 4 or more is preset (indicated by “◯” in FIGS. 6 to 8), and “1 / 16384 ”(4/65536) or more, the number of judgment values is set to 0 when the game is not targeted for the lottery according to the game state (“-”in FIGS. 6 to 8). ,), So that the lottery target winning combination is not won.

  In addition, each lottery target combination includes a predetermined winning combination, and by winning one lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the winning of the winning combination included in the lottery target combination is allowed. In this case, the combination of symbols forming the winning combination for which the winning is permitted is stopped on the winning line LN of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the winning is generated. Then, according to the winning combination of the combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, if the winning combination is a re-gaming combination, a re-game is given, and if the winning combination is a small winning combination, When a predetermined number of medals are paid out according to the winning combination and the winning combination is a special winning combination, it is controlled to a special state.

  In addition, some of the lottery target combinations that are targeted for the lottery in the internal lottery include the AT, and at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, the lottery target combinations including the AT in the state where the AT is not controlled are By winning, it is decided that the AT is controlled. Further, at the start of the game in which the internal lottery is performed, it is determined that the lottery target winning combination including the AT wins under the control of the AT, and it is determined that the remaining number of games of the AT is to be added. The number of additional games determined in advance according to the type of lottery target winning combination including is added to the number of remaining games of the AT. In addition, in the present embodiment, some of the lottery target combinations include AT, and when the lottery target combination including the AT wins, the AT and the additional game win. However, by winning the lottery target including the AT, it is only decided to perform the AT lottery that determines whether to control the AT or the additional lottery that determines whether to add the additional game, and the internal lottery It may be configured such that the AT and the additional game can be won by performing the AT lottery and the additional lottery when the lottery target combination including the AT is won, and winning the relevant lottery. That is, when deciding whether to grant the AT or the additional game, the second-stage lottery may be carried out when the result of the internal lottery reaches a predetermined result. Further, the main control unit 41 determines AT based on only the result of the internal lottery when deciding whether to give the AT or the additional game, and determines the result of the internal lottery about the number of additional games. The configuration may be such that the second stage of the lottery is used to determine when the predetermined result is obtained. Further, when determining whether or not to add the AT and the additional game, the main control unit 41 performs the second-stage lottery for the AT when the result of the internal lottery is a predetermined result. The number of additional games may be determined based on only the result of the internal lottery. Further, the main control unit 41 may be configured to perform a lottery in three or more stages when deciding whether to grant the AT or the additional game.

  In addition, regarding the lottery target roles related to the special role among the lottery target roles, the game state is a normal game state in which the special role is not carried over, a carryover in which the special role is carried over (inside), or a special state. At least one of the lottery target combination to be the target of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values thereof (probability of winning) differs depending on whether there is a certain RB (including RBs in BB1 and BB). As for the winning combination related to the small winning combination, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, carry-over (inside), RB in BB1 (BB1), RB in BB2 (BB2), or RB by RB winning (Figure) At least one of the lottery target combination to be the target of the internal lottery and the number of judgment values thereof (winning probability) is different depending on whether it is a middle RB). With regard to the lottery target combination relating to the re-game combination, the lottery target combination to be the target of the internal lottery or its determination value number (winning probability) depending on whether the game state is RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4. ) At least one is different.

  As shown in FIG. 6, as a lottery target combination relating to the re-play, a normal re-play, RT2 transition re-play 1, RT2 transition re-play 2, RT2 transition re-play 3, RT2 transition re-play 4, RT2 transition re-play 5, RT2 Transition Re-Game 6, RT3 Transition Re-Game, RT1 Transition Re-Game 1, RT1 Transition Re-Game 2, RT1 Transition Re-Game 3, RT1 Transition Re-Game 4, RT1 Transition Re-Game 5, RT1 Transition Re-Game 6, Advantage State Transition Re Game 1, advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, advantageous state transition re-game 2, advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are included. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more re-gaming roles as a winning combination, and by winning the lottery targeting role related to re-gaming in the internal lottery, one of the re-gaming roles must be won. Then, a replay game (replay) is given.

  At RT0, four or more judgment value numbers are set for the normal re-play among the lottery target combinations related to the re-game, and 0 judgment value numbers are set for the other lottery target combinations related to the re-play. .. Further, in RT1, for the normal re-game, RT2 transition re-games 1-6, advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set. The number of determination values of 0 is set for other lottery target combinations relating to the re-game. Further, in RT2, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for the normal replay, the RT3 transition replay, the RT1 transition regame 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition regame 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition regame 2 + AT. The number of determination values of 0 is set for other lottery target combinations relating to the re-game. Further, in RT3, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal replay, the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, the advantageous state transition regame 1 + AT, and the advantageous state transition regame 2 + AT. The number of determination values of 0 is set for other lottery target combinations relating to the re-game. Further, in the inside, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the normal replay. Advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT, advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT is invalid and cannot be read out in the internal lottery. For the lottery target combination relating to other re-games, the number of judgment values is 0. Is set. In addition, in the RB, the determination value number of 0 is set for the lottery target combinations relating to these replays.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery target combination for which the number of judgment values is set to 4 or more can be won by the internal lottery in the game state in which the number of judgment values is set, and is considered as a substantial lottery target. Become. On the other hand, the lottery target combination for which the determination value number of 0 is set is not actually selected as the lottery target because it is not won in the internal lottery in the gaming state in which the determination value number is set. For example, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are set to a judgment value number of 4 or more in any of the game states, and thus are substantially selected in any of the game states. On the other hand, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 are set as the judgment value number of 0 in any of the game states, and thus are not substantially targeted for the lottery in any of the game states.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, there is no setting difference for the lottery target combination relating to the re-game, and the internal lottery is won with a similar probability regardless of the set value (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1. To do.

  Further, among the lottery target combinations relating to the re-game, the advantageous state transition re-game 1 + AT and the advantageous state transition re-game 2 + AT are targets of the AT lottery, and when the lottery target combination is won in a state not controlled by the AT. , That is, the AT has been won, and when the lottery target winning combination is won under the control of the AT, the addition of the number of games remaining in the AT is won. On the other hand, when the lottery target combination for another re-game wins, it means that the AT has not won (non-winning).

  In addition, among the lottery target combinations related to the re-game, the RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and these lottery target combinations are elected under the control of the AT. When this is done, navigation notification is given.

  As shown in FIG. 7, as a lottery target combination relating to a small combination and a special combination, and a lottery target combination related to AT control, cherry, cherry + AT, watermelon, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2 , Push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6, SB, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon + AT , BB2 + cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon + AT. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small and special roles as winning roles, and if the lottery target roles related to small roles and special roles are won in the internal lottery, they will be awarded as winning roles. When a small role wins, the number of medals according to the small role is paid out, and when a special role wins as a winning role, the special state is controlled according to the special role, and none of the winning roles wins. When it comes out, it is out of the way.

  In RT0 to 3 and inside, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, among lottery target roles related to small wins and special wins, For the push order bell 6, SB, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon + AT, four or more determination values are set. In RT0 to 3 and inside, among the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination, the number of judgment values of 0 is 0 for cherry, watermelon, RB + cherry, RB + watermelon, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + watermelon, BB2 + cherry, BB2 + watermelon. It is set. Also, in RB, among the lottery targets related to small wins and special wins, regarding cherry, watermelon, push order bell 1, push order bell 2, push order bell 3, push order bell 4, push order bell 5, push order bell 6 Is set to 4 or more judgment values. In the RB, among the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination, cherry + AT, watermelon + AT, RB + cherry, RB + cherry + AT, RB + watermelon, RB + watermelon + AT, BB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry + AT, BB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon + AT, BB2 +. For cherry, BB2 + cherry + AT, BB2 + watermelon, and BB2 + watermelon + AT, the number of determination values of 0 is set.

  In the present embodiment, in RB, by setting the number of determination values of the lottery target winning combination including the AT (small winning combination + AT, special winning combination + small winning combination + AT, special winning combination + AT) to 0, during RB (while BB1, In BB2 and RB), the later-described AT and the number of AT-added games will not be won. However, even during the RB, the number of determination values of the lottery target combination including the AT may be set to 4 or more so that the number of additional games of the AT and the AT can be won. As such a configuration, for example, in an RB that is controlled by the winning of a special role in which there is no difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the set values (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1, The number of judgment values of the lottery target combination including AT may be set to 4 or more, and the number of games to be added to AT or AT may be won. In addition, in the RBs controlled by the winning of the special role, which has a difference in the probability of winning in the internal lottery according to the setting values (1 to 6) of the slot machine 1, the lottery target roles including the AT The number of determination values of 4 may be set to 4 or more, and the number of AT and AT addition games may be won.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 7, with respect to the lottery target combinations related to the small winning combination and the special role, and the lottery target winning combinations related to the control of the AT, no setting difference is set for any of the lottery target winning combinations, The internal lottery is won with the same probability regardless of the set values (1 to 6) of the machine 1.

  In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, Cherry + AT, Watermelon + AT, RB + Cherry + AT, RB + Watermelon + AT, BB1 + Cherry + AT, BB1 + Watermelon + AT, BB2 + Cherry + AT, BB2 + Watermelon + AT are targets of the AT lottery. ing. When these lottery target winning combinations are won under the control of the AT, it means that the winning combination is AT. When these lottery target winning combinations are won under the control of the AT, the addition of the number of remaining games of the AT is won. On the other hand, if a lottery target combination related to another small combination and a special combination and a lottery target combination related to AT control is won, it means that the AT has not won (non-winning).

  In addition, among the lottery target combinations related to the small winning combination and the special combination, the push-order bells 1 to 6 are navigation targets, and when the lottery target combinations are won under the control of the AT, the navigation notification is given. Done. On the other hand, when a lottery target combination related to another small combination and a special combination and a lottery target combination related to the control of the AT is won, no navigation notification is given regardless of whether the combination is controlled by the AT.

  In the inside or RB (including RB, RB in BB1, and RB in BB2), the special combination, the special combination + AT, and the special combination + general combination are not the targets of the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a lottery target combination relating to a small combination and a special combination, which is not related to the control of the AT, includes a bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay. Be done. Each of these lottery target roles includes one or more small wins, special roles, and re-playing roles as winning combinations, and when the lottery target roles related to small wins and special roles are won in the internal lottery, When a small role is won as a winning combination, the number of medals according to the small role is paid out, and when a special role is won as a winning combination, the special state is controlled according to the special role, and the special re-combination is performed as a winning combination. When a game wins, a replay game (replay) is given, and when no winning combination is won, the game is out of play.

  In RT0-3, inside, the number of judgment values of 4 or more is set for the bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, BB2, BB2 + special replay among the lottery target combinations related to the small combination and the special combination. .. Further, in RB, the number of determination values of 4 or more is set for Bell, and the number of determination values is set to 0 for RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay, and BB2, BB2 + special replay.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 8, with respect to the lottery target combinations related to the small winning combination and the special combination and not related to the control of the AT, any lottery target combination is provided with a setting difference, and the slot machine The internal lottery is won with different probabilities according to the set value of 1 (1 to 6).

  In addition, none of the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role are Bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay game, BB2, BB2 + special replay game, and these lottery target roles are not subject to AT lottery. When the player wins, the AT and the number of additional games are out of proportion.

  In addition, among the lottery target roles related to the small role and the special role, none of the bell, RB, BB1, BB1 + special replay game, BB2, BB2 + special replay game is a navigation target, and these lottery target roles are won. At times, no navigation notification is given regardless of whether or not the vehicle is controlled by the AT.

[About playing state]
Next, the transition of the game state controlled by the main control unit 41 and the outline of the game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining transition of game states (RT1 to 4, inside, RB (including RB in BB1, RB in BB2, and RB with RB winning)) controlled by the main control unit 41. Is. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the game state.

  In the present embodiment, the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41 is RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3 as a normal gaming state, and the special combination (RB, BB1, BB2) is carried over inside, and the bonus state is a special state. (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2) are included and controlled to one of the gaming states.

  RT0 shifts at the end of the bonus (BB1 to 3, RB). Then, RT0, regardless of the number of games after moving to RT2, moves to RT1 when a predetermined specific symbol stops on the pay line LN, or when SB wins, or by winning a special role. It ends by moving inside. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100% regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RT1 is, at RT0, a predetermined specific symbol is stopped on the pay line LN, or SB is won, at RT2, RT3, a predetermined specific symbol is stopped on the pay line LN, or RT1 transition replay. The game shifts when the SB wins. Then, the RT1 ends regardless of the number of games after the transfer to the RT1 by moving to the RT2 when the RT2 transfer re-game is won or transferred to the inside by winning the special combination. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100% regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RT2 shifts when the RT2 shift replay wins at RT1. Then, RT2, regardless of the number of games after moving to RT2, moves to RT1 by stopping a predetermined specific symbol on the payline LN, or moves to RT3 by winning the RT3 transfer replay. Or a special character wins and moves to the inside. In RT2, the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% at least by performing the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RT3 shifts when the RT3 shift replay wins at RT2. Then, RT3, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT3, a predetermined specific symbol is stopped on the pay line LN, or RT1 transition replay, SB shifts to RT1 by winning, or It ends when the special role is elected and moves inside. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% at least when the stop operations are performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification. Here, the state in which the navigation notification is executed during RT2 or RT3 is also referred to as ART state. In RT2 and RT3, the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than in RT1, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in accordance with the navigation notification during AT, so that the payout rate of medals exceeds 100%. The payout rate is less than 100%, which is more advantageous for the player than the RT1 state.

  Inside, the special roles (RB, BB1, BB2) will be selected in RT0-3. Then, inside the inside, regardless of the number of games after the inside, the special part that triggered the inside becomes a prize and becomes a bonus (RB, RB in BB1, RB in BB2). It ends by moving. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100% regardless of whether the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification.

  RBs (RBs) are transferred by winning RBs inside. Then, the RB ends when 12 games are exhausted or six awards are won. Also, in RB, special roles and re-gaming roles are excluded from the internal lottery, and the winning probability of the small role is higher than RT0 to 3 and has a high probability (about 1 / 1.0). The payout rate of medals exceeds 100%.

  BB1 and BB2 (RB) are transferred by the winning of BB1 and BB2 inside. Then, in BB1 and BB2, the total number of medals paid out in BB1 and BB2 exceeds the specified number (316 in this embodiment) regardless of the number of games after the transition to BB1 and BB2. finish. In BB1 and BB2, the above-mentioned RB is always controlled, and in RBs in BB1 and BB2, the special winning combination and the re-gaming combination are excluded from the internal lottery, so the winning probability of the small winning combination is It has a higher probability (about 1 / 1.0) than RT0 to 3, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  Of RT0 to 3, inside, and bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2), bonuses (RB, BB1, BB2) have the highest payout rate of medals per game, and are the most advantageous gaming state. Further, among RT0 to RT3, RT2 and 3 are higher than the players RT0 and 1 in that the winning probability of the re-play combination is high and the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT0 and RT1. It can be said that it is in an advantageous state for. Further, RT2, 3 and RT2, 3 among the inside are more advantageous to the player than inside because the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that in the inside.

[Combination of symbols to stop on the pay line LN]
Next, a combination of symbols stopped on the pay line LN of the reel according to the type of the lottery target combination of the internal lottery and the stop order will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 and FIG. 12 are diagrams for explaining the symbol combination stopped by the lottery target combination according to the stop operation mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different according to the type and the stop order. .. The RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least the RT2 transition re-play role and the normal re-play role as winning combinations, and the RT2 transition re-play role is a re-play role to which a replay game is given by winning. Is included in the game state and the game state is shifted to RT2, and the normal re-gaming role includes a re-gaming role in which a replay game is only given by winning.

  For example, when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left-middle-right stop order (the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, and the right reel as the third stop). When it is performed, the combination of the symbols that make up the RT2 transition re-gaming combination is stopped on the pay line LN, while when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order on the left-middle-right, the normal operation is repeated. The combination of symbols forming the game combination stops on the pay line LN. In addition, even when the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won, similarly to when the RT2 transition re-game 1 is won, in a predetermined stop order that is predetermined according to the type of the RT2 transition re-games 2 to 6. When the stop operation is performed, while the combination of symbols forming the RT2 transition re-game combination is stopped on the pay line LN, when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, normally, The combination of symbols forming the re-game combination stops on the pay line LN.

  As a result, when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won in RT1, the RT2 transition replay role is won by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, that type is intentionally set. It is not possible to select the stop order according to, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to shift to RT2 by winning the RT2 transition re-game combination, but if the stop order does not match, the normal re-play combination Will be won and RT1 will be maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, a combination of symbols to be stopped according to the type and the stop order. Is different. The RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 include at least the RT1 transition re-game role and the normal re-game role as winning combinations, and the RT1 transition re-game role is a re-play role to which a replay game is given by winning. In addition, the game state is a transition role that is transitioned to RT1, and the normal replay role is a replay role that is only given a replay game by winning.

  When the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order that is predetermined according to the type of the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, a symbol that constitutes a normal re-game combination While the combination is stopped on the pay line LN, when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the combination of symbols forming the RT1 transition re-game combination is stopped on the pay line LN. ..

  As a result, at the time of winning the RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 in RT2 and RT3, the normal re-game combination is won by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, it is intentionally changed. It is not possible to select the stop order according to the type, and if the stop order matches, it is possible to avoid shifting to RT1 by winning the normal re-game combination, but the stop order must match. In this case, the RT1 transfer re-game player will be transferred to RT1 after winning the prize.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, when the RT3 transition re-game is won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped is different depending on the type and the stop order. There is no. The RT3 transition re-gaming includes at least the RT3 transition re-gaming role as a winning combination, and the RT3 transition re-gaming role is a re-gaming role to which a replay game is given by winning and the gaming state becomes RT3. It is a transition role to be transitioned.

  When the RT3 transition re-game is won, the combination of symbols forming the RT3 transition re-game combination is stopped on the pay line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, at the time of winning the RT3 transition re-game in RT2, regardless of the stop order, the RT3 transition re-game combination wins, and the RT3 transition re-game wins, whereby the game is transitioned to RT3.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the present embodiment, even when the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the symbols to be stopped according to the type and the stop order The combination is never different. The advantageous state transition re-game 1 includes at least the advantageous state transition re-game role 1 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game role 1 is a re-game role to which a replay game is given by winning. Along with this, it is a transition part that is transitioned to an advantageous state (state in which AT control is performed). Further, the advantageous state transition re-game 2 includes at least the advantageous state transition re-game role 2 as a winning combination, and the advantageous state transition re-game role 2 is a re-game role to which a replay game is given by winning. In addition, it is a transition role that is shifted to an advantageous state (state in which AT control is performed).

  When the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 are won, the combination of symbols forming the advantageous state transition re-game hands 1 and 2 that have been won is stopped on the pay line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, at the time of winning the advantageous state transition re-games 1 and 2 in RT1 to 3, the advantageous state transition re-game player wins regardless of the stop order, and the advantageous state transition re-game player wins, thereby becoming an advantageous state. Will be migrated.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs depending on the type and the stop order. The push order bells 1 to 6 include at least a bell and a special small winning combination as a winning combination, and the bell is a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. Further, the special small win is a small win in which a predetermined number of medals, which are smaller than when the bell is won, are paid out by winning the prize.

  For example, when the push order bell 1 is won, the stop operation is performed in the left-middle-right stop order (the stop order of stopping the left reel as the first stop, the middle reel as the second stop, and the right reel as the third stop). If the combination of the symbols that make up the bell is stopped on the pay line LN, if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order on the left middle right, the symbol that forms the special small win Or the combination of specific symbols without the addition of medals is stopped on the pay line LN. Also, when the push order bells 2 to 6 are won, as in the case where the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop order that is predetermined according to the types of the push order bells 2 to 6. When performed, the combination of symbols forming the bell stops on the pay line LN, while when the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the predetermined stop order, the combination of the symbols forming the special small win A combination or a combination of specific symbols without giving a medal stops on the pay line LN.

  Therefore, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether or not the push order bells 1 to 6 are operated in the stop order according to the type. Further, in particular, in RT2 and RT3, when the stop order does not match, the specific symbol stops, so that if the stop order does not match, the process moves to RT1 at a constant rate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when the SB is selected as the lottery target in the internal lottery, the specific symbols constituting the SB prize are given priority regardless of the stop order. Stop at LN. Therefore, in RT0 to 3, at the time of SB winning, the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the specific symbol can be stopped, so that the specific symbol constituting the SB prize is stopped and the process shifts to RT1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the present embodiment, when RB1 + cherry, BB1 + cherry, and BB2 + cherry are selected as the lottery targets in the internal lottery, the cherry composition symbol has priority regardless of the stop order. And stops at the pay line LN. Further, when RB1 + watermelon, BB1 + watermelon, BB2 + watermelon are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the watermelon composition pattern is preferentially stopped on the pay line LN regardless of the stop order. As a result, at the time of winning these special winning combinations + small winning combinations, the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the small winning combinations can be stopped, so that the small winning combinations are stopped and the winning special winning roles are It will be carried over to the next game or later, and the winning special role will be performed by performing the stop operation at the timing when the small role composition pattern can not be stopped and at the timing when the winning special pattern composition pattern can be stopped The composition pattern of is stopped, and the bonus is transferred.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, when BB1 + special re-game and BB2 + special re-game are won as the lottery target combination in the internal lottery, the special re-game is configured regardless of the stop order. The symbol has priority and stops at the pay line LN. As a result, when these special combination + special re-game are won, the composition pattern of the special re-game is stopped, and the winning special combination is carried over to the next game or later.

[About AT]
In the slot machine according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT1, 2, 3 or more, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification for notifying the stop order which is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to control the assist time (hereinafter referred to as AT) which is a notification period.

  When the main control unit 41 is controlled by the AT, the navigation target is executed by winning the navigation target combination according to the game state, and the player is notified based on the winning number of the selected navigation notification combination. The liquid crystal display 51 and the like are notified by notifying the stop order that is advantageous for the player and transmitting a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91. The navigation effect using is executed. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying a certain condition even in the normal state where the AT is not controlling.

  When the main control unit 41 is under AT control, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination according to the game state, and also issues the first internal winning command to the sub control unit 91. , The second internal winning command and the pressing order command are transmitted to execute the navigation effect by the sub-control unit 91. The notification target combination according to the game state is RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT1 and RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 and push order bells 1 to 6 when RT2. Is. Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and execute the navigation effect by satisfying a certain condition even in the normal state where the AT is not controlled. In the navigation notification of the present embodiment, by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12, the stop order advantageous for the player can be notified in a distinguishable manner.

  The navigation effect executed by the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment indicates the stop order advantageous for the player notified by the navigation notification, displaying the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and the navigation voice from the speakers 53 and 54. And output. For example, when notifying the left-middle-right stop order, a stop switch 8L such as "123" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop), A stop order image showing the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. Also, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as "left middle right!" (Indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop). Is output. In addition, when notifying the stop order of the left reel as the first stop, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R such as "1--" (indicating that the left reel is the first stop) is indicated. Display the stop order image. In addition, as the navigation voice, for example, a voice indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as “left!” (Indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) is output. To do. The mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and may be any mode as long as the player can distinguish it according to the winning situation. Further, the navigation effect is not limited to that using the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54, and may be performed using the effect effect LED 52, the reel LED 55 and the like.

  In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any of the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the RT2 transition replay is won is identifiable. Further, when any one of the push order bells 1 to 6 is won in RT1, the stop order in which the bell wins is notified in a distinguishable manner. Further, in RT2 as well, in RT3, when any of the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 is won, the stop order in which the normal replay wins is identifiably notified. Also, in both RT2 and RT3, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the stop order in which the bell wins is identifiable. Further, when the SB is elected, the fact that the SB is elected is identifiably notified.

  Thus, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified in a distinguishable manner. Therefore, the player can intentionally cause the RT2 transition replay at RT1 to be transferred to RT2 and be transferred to RT2 by performing the stop operation in the stop order according to the navigation effect, and the bell can be won. It is possible to avoid winning the RT1 transition re-game by winning the normal re-game at RT2 and 3, winning the bell, avoiding the stop of the specific symbol, and avoiding the SB prize.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the AT is controlled by the internal lottery. When the internal control unit 41 wins the AT, the main control unit 41 controls the AT after the warning period. The main control unit 41 sets an AT flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when starting control of the AT. Then, the AT flag is reset when the number of remaining games of AT becomes 0. In RT1, the state from the start of AT control to the transition to RT2 is also called a ready state. In the ready state, the main control unit 41 executes navigation notification when the target winning combination is won. At this time, in RT1, when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the navigation information is targeted, and when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the navigation order notifies the stop order in which the RT2 transition replays are won. Therefore, by performing a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it becomes possible to shift the RT2 replay game to RT2 from RT1. In addition, in the ready state, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, the stop order in which the middle bell is won is notified. Therefore, by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, it is possible to surely obtain the medal. Becomes

  The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the RT2 transition re-game is won in RT1 and the game is transitioned to RT2. In this embodiment, when shifting to RT2 during AT, the state shifts to the ART state, which is advantageous for the player. Therefore, when the process shifts to RT2 during AT, the freeze control is performed and the start effect is executed in order to notify that the process has shifted to the ART state. The effect and control during the freeze will be described later. In addition, the main control unit 41 sets a predetermined number of games as the number of remaining games of the AT allocated to the RAM 41c when the preparation state is completed, and starts counting the number of remaining games of the AT. Even after moving to RT2, the stop order for winning the bells is notified when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, so by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it is possible to surely obtain medals. At the same time, it is possible to avoid the stop of the specific symbol and avoid shifting to RT1. In addition, after the transition to RT2, the stop order for winning the normal replay is notified when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, the RT1 transition replay is performed. While avoiding the winning of the winning combination, the player can wait for the winning combination of the RT3 and win the winning combination of the RT3 and move to the RT3. It is possible to avoid shifting to RT1, and since it is notified that the SB has been won when the SB is won, it is possible to avoid winning the SB and avoid shifting to RT1.

  Also, after the start of AT, the number of remaining games is decremented by 1 each time one game is exhausted, and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, the control of AT is terminated. Since the navigation notification will not be executed with this, it is possible to avoid the stop of the specific symbol when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, and to avoid the prize of the RT1 transition replay when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected. It becomes impossible, and the control of a series of ATs will be completed by shifting to RT1 by stopping the specific symbol or winning the RT1 shift replay game. In the present embodiment, when the number of AT games becomes 0, in order to notify that the AT control is to be ended, the freeze control is performed and the end effect is executed. In addition, after the start of AT and before the remaining number of games becomes 0, if the addition of the remaining number of AT games is won by the internal lottery, the number of won games is added to the remaining number of AT games.

  Further, if the special combination is won after the start of the AT and before the number of remaining games becomes 0, the AT is interrupted by the end of RT1 and the counting of the number of the AT games is also interrupted. If the special role is won during AT and the AT is interrupted, the bonus is controlled to the corresponding bonus after winning the special role won, and the specific symbol is stopped and moved to RT1 at RT0 after the bonus ends. The control of the AT is restarted at the time of the shift, and accordingly, the state of the remaining games of the AT is restarted by shifting to RT2 after the preparation state. In the present embodiment, the start effect is executed even when the bonus is transferred during the AT and the ART state is transferred again after the bonus ends. It should be noted that the start effect may not be executed when the bonus is transferred during the AT and the ART state (AT and the state controlled by RT2 or RT3) is changed again after the bonus ends.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order in which the bell wins by the navigation notification when the push order bells 1 to 6 in the AT are elected, and ignores the notified stop order to perform the stop operation. In the case of performing, the bell may be won and RT2 and RT3 may be maintained, but the specific symbol may be stopped and the process may shift to RT1. Further, when the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are elected and the stop operation is performed ignoring the notified stop order, the RT1 transition replay wins and the game is transitioned to RT1. When RT2, 3 shifts to RT1 during AT, AT continues and subtracts 1 from the number of remaining games of AT each time one game is exhausted. It is possible to inform the stop order of winning the RT1 transition replay at the time of winning of ~ 6 by navigation notification and perform the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order so that the RT1 transition replay is won and the RT1 transition is transferred from RT2. It is possible.

[About start production and end production]
In the present embodiment, a start effect is executed to notify that the ART state has been entered. The start effect is an effect of displaying a character such as “AT start!” On the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. Further, in the start effect, a predetermined sound (for example, fanfare sound) is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The start effect is performed while the freeze control is being performed.

  In addition, an end effect is executed to notify that the AT control is to be ended. The ending effect is an effect of displaying a character such as "AT game end" on the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. Further, in the end effect, a predetermined sound (for example, ending sound) is output from the speakers 53 and 54. The start effect is performed while the freeze control is being performed. An image indicating "the total number of medals awarded during AT" may be displayed instead of the character "AT game end".

[Internal winning command setting process]
Next, the control content of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 15. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning number of a special winning combination, a winning number for transmission, and a navigation number in the first internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the winning numbers of the small winning combination and the re-gaming combination, the transmitting winning numbers, and the navigation numbers in the second internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the internal winning command setting process performed by the main control unit.

  In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target winning combination, and a lottery target winning combination that may be carried over, that is, a special role winning number table in which the winning number for each type of special winning role is set, A lottery target winning combination that is not carried over, that is, a general winning combination winning number table in which a winning number for each type of general winning combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the special winning combination number table, when no special winning combination is won, that is, when the winning number is "0", the winning number of BB1, BB2, RB, SB is "1". "To" 4 "are assigned. Further, as shown in FIG. 14, in the general combination winning number table, “0” is selected as the winning number of the lottery target combination related to the re-game, when no general combination is won, that is, in the case of being out of sync. "1" to "16" are assigned "20" to "28" as the winning numbers of the lottery target winning combinations related to the small winning combinations. As described above, in the special winning combination number table and the general winning combination number table, the lottery target combination in the internal lottery and the winning number are set in association with each other.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the internal lottery process when the start operation is performed, and when either one of the special winning combination and the general winning combination is won in the internal lottery, A winning number corresponding to the lottery target winning combination determined to be won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when no winning combination is won, a winning number corresponding to the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role is awarded. Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is acquired. , Is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (content of command). When storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, 41 stores MODE indicating that the first internal winning command is the first internal winning command, and the second byte EXT is a winning prize for transmission of a special character. Store the number.

  After storing the first internal winning command in the step Sf3, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired in the internal lottery process (Sf4), and the acquired winning number is less than 2. Whether or not (Sf5), less than 15 (Sf6), less than 22 (Sf7), and less than 28 (Sf8) are sequentially determined to obtain the winning prize. It is determined which of a plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

  When it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, when the winning number is 0 or 1, the winning number for transmission is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). When it is determined that the winning number is not less than 2 in the step Sf5 and is less than 15 in the step Sf6, that is, when the winning number is any of 2 to 14, the winning number for transmission is determined. 2 is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf11). If it is determined that the winning number is not less than 15 in the step Sf6 and less than 22 in the step Sf7, that is, if the winning number is either 20 or 21, the winning number is The winning number for transmission is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12). If it is determined in step Sf7 that the winning number is not less than 22, and if it is determined in step Sf8 that it is less than 28, that is, if the winning number is any of 22 to 27, the winning number for transmission is determined. 22 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). When it is determined in step Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 28, that is, when the winning number is 28, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf12).

  Then, after setting the transmission winning number of the general combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in steps Sf9, Sf11, and Sf12, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number (Sf10). ). When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that the second internal winning command is the second internal winning command, and stores a general character in the EXT of the second byte. Stores the winning number for transmission.

  After storing the second internal winning command in the command queue in step Sf10, the internal winning command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the winning number for transmission, and the first winning number including the winning number for transmission is set. The internal winning command of is set in the command queue.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general winning combination set in the predetermined region of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0-1, 15-21, 28). In this case, the winning number is set as the sending winning number, and the second internal winning command including the sending winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the first predetermined range (0-1, 16-21, 28) is set in the internal winning, The winning number in the internal lottery can be specified based on the included winning number for transmission.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 14), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 14) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. Based on the above, it is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the second predetermined range (2 to 14) the winning number is, while the winning number falls within the second predetermined range (2 to 14). It is possible to identify certain things.

  When the winning number is within the third predetermined range (22 to 27), one winning number (22) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when the winning number within the third predetermined range (22 to 27) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. Based on the above, it is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (22 to 27) the winning number is, while the winning number falls within the third predetermined range (22 to 27). It is possible to identify certain things.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment are executed by the timer interrupt process (main) after that, to the sub control unit 91. Will be sequentially transmitted.

[Control contents of push-order command transmission processing]
Next, the control content of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing the navigation numbers notified by the main control unit by the navigation notification. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the push-order command setting process performed by the main control unit.

  In the present embodiment, a navigation number (0 to 9) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification and a navigation number (10 to 13) that can identify a predetermined symbol suggested by the navigation notification are pre-assigned, and the lottery is performed. Among the target winning combinations, the notification target winning combination has a navigation number assigned in advance for each type thereof, and a navigation number table in which the navigation number for each type of lottery target winning combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the navigation numbers are 0 indicating the standard pressing order (in this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), the first stop is the left reel 2L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 2C, 1 indicating the stop order in which the third stop is the right reel 2R, 1st stop is in the left reel 2L, 2nd stop is in the right reel 2R, and 3rd stop is the middle reel 2C. The stop order is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the right reel 2R, the stop order is 3, the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the right reel 2R, and the third stop is the left. Reel 4 is the stop order, the first stop is the right reel 2R, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the middle reel 2C, the stop order is 5, the first stop is the right reel 2R, 2 stops are the middle reel 2C and the 3rd stop is the left reel 2L. 2L is the first stop, that is, the left first stop is 7, the middle reel 2C is the first stop, that is, the middle first stop is 8, and the right reel 2R is the first stop. 9 indicating the right first stop is set. Further, as a navigation number, it suggests a stop operation at a timing at which the red 7 symbol can be stopped at the pay line LN, and suggests a stop operation at a timing at which the blue 7 symbol can be stopped at the pay line LN 11, 12, which indicates a stop operation at the timing when the white 7 symbol can be stopped on the pay line LN, and 13 which indicates a stop operation at a timing when the BAR symbol can be stopped on the pay line LN are set.

  In the present embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard press order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard press order is disadvantageously advantageous to the player. Other stop orders may be used as long as the standard push order does not occur.

  In the navigation number table, a navigation number is set for each type of special combination. As shown in FIG. 13, BB1 is 10, BB2 is 11, RB is 12, and SB is 13. It is set. It should be noted that 0 is set in the case where the special combination is not won.

  In addition, in the navigation number table, as to the notification target combination of the lottery target combinations, as shown in FIG. 14, a navigation number is set for each type, and RT2 transition re-game 1, RT1 transition re-game 1, push order For bell 1, "1" is RT2 transition replay 2, RT1 transition replay 2, push order bell 2 For "2", RT2 transition replay 3, RT1 transition replay 3, push order bell 3 About "3", RT2 transition re-game 4, RT1 transition re-game 4, push order bell 4, "4", RT2 transition re-play 5, RT1 transition re-game 5, push order bell 5 , "5" is set for the RT2 transition replay 6, the RT1 transition replay 6, and the push order bell 6, "6" is set. Note that, among the lottery target combinations, which are not notification target combinations, normal re-games, RT3 transition re-games, advantageous state transition re-games 1, 2, cherry, watermelon, and bell have no navigation numbers set.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, when the start operation is performed and when the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, the winning of the general winning combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The push order command setting process for setting the push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 17, in the push order command setting process, first, the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery processing are acquired (Sg1), and then the RAM 41c. With reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being set, which is set in a predetermined area, the state in which the navigation notification is performed (when the navigation notification is performed in AT or in non-AT, will be described later). It is determined whether or not it is a state after the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special role is satisfied until the special role is won) (Sg2). When it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation is not informed, whether or not the winning combination is determined on the pay line LN is determined based on the stop status of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and the result of the internal lottery. Is determined (Sg5), and if the winning combination to be stopped on the pay line LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in this embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg6).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is in effect, or if it is determined in step Sg5 that the winning combination to be stopped on the pay line LN has been determined, it is stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 41b. With reference to the navigation number table, the navigation numbers corresponding to the winning numbers of the special combination and the general combination acquired in step Sg1 are set as the transmission navigation numbers in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is specified that the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning number, the combination of the RT2 transition replays is stopped on the pay line LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number indicating the stop order is set as the sending navigation number. Further, when it is specified that the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination of the normal replays is stopped on the pay line LN according to the type of the winning combination. Is set as the sending navigation number.

  In addition, when it is specified that the pushing order bells 1 to 6 are won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of bells is stopped on the pay line LN is determined according to the type of the winning combination. The indicated navigation number is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, one of the special winning combinations (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) has been won based on the internal winning number, and the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special winning combination (in this embodiment, after the winning of the special winning combination, the predetermined game is performed). If it is determined that the number (for example, 5 games has elapsed) has been established, and that no small win has been won (off), the type of special role won Correspondingly, the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the symbols forming the special combination are set as the transmission navigation numbers. It should be noted that the condition for carrying out the navigation of the special part may be triggered by the fact that the special part has been won.

  After the transmission navigation number is set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in step Sg3 or step Sg6, the push order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When storing the push-order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the push-order command in the first byte and the transmission navigation number in EXT in the second byte.

  After the push-order command is stored in the command queue in step Sg4, the push-order command setting process is terminated and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous to the player when the navigation notification is being executed. When a push order command that can specify the stop operation mode is set in the command queue and the navigation notification is not being executed, the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player cannot be specified, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also sets a push order command that can specify the stop order, which is a standard stop operation mode, in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the push-order command setting process each time a stop operation is performed, so that the main line control unit 41 stops at the pay line LN even when the navigation notification is not being executed. If is determined, a push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player is set in the command queue.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, by the execution of the push order command setting process, for example, the game state is RT1, RT2 transition re-game 1 is won in a state in which the navigation notification is not performed. This is the case, and when none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the RT2 transition replay and the normal replay can be stopped, but it is not decided which hand will stop, so the standard navigation The number (“0”) is set as the transmission navigation number, and the push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Also, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the RT2 transition replay and the normal transition replay can still be stopped, and it is not certain which combination will stop, so it is standard as a transmission navigation number. The push order command including the navigation number (“0”) is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the RT2 transition replay can be stopped by the stop of the right reel 2R thereafter, and the role to stop Even if the navigation information is not given, the navigation number (“1”) that can specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player (the stop order for winning the RT2 transition replay) will be sent. It is set as a credit navigation number. When the reels other than the left reel 2L are stopped in the first stop, the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when the reels other than the middle reel 2C are stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop is performed. Regardless of the order, only the normal replay can be stopped, and the winning combination is decided, so even if the navigation is not informed, the navigation number that can be advantageous to the player can be specified. "1") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, when the game state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, even if the RT2 transition replays 2 to 6 are won, in the same manner as when the RT2 transition replay 1 is won, the RT2 transition replay is performed. , When it is not decided which combination of the normal replay will be stopped, the push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and any combination of the RT2 transition replay and the normal replay is stopped. When it is decided whether or not to do, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set.

  Further, for example, when the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, and the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won, and when neither reel 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, RT1 Transition replay, normal replay can be stopped, but it is not decided which combination will stop, so the standard navigation number (“0”) that cannot specify the stop order of RT1 transition replay is It is set as a transmission navigation number, and a push order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the normal replay can be stopped and the winning combination to be stopped is determined, which is advantageous for the player even in the state where the navigation information is not given. A navigation number (“1”) that can specify the stop order (the stop order in which the normal replay is won) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C or the right reel 2R is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the RT1 transition replay is stopped, so a navigation number (““ which can be advantageous to the player can be specified. 1 ") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, when the game state is RT2, 3 and the navigation notification is not performed, even if the RT1 transition re-games 2 to 6 are won, the RT1 transition is moved in the same manner as when the RT1 transition re-game 1 is won. When it is not decided which one of the re-play and the normal re-play will stop, a push-order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and either the RT1-shift re-play or the normal re-play When it is determined whether or not to stop, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player is set.

  Further, even if the push order bells 1 to 6 are won in a state where the navigation information is not given, in the same way as when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, either the bell or the special small hand, or When it is not decided whether the specific symbol is stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and when it is determined which hand or specific symbol is stopped, it is advantageous for the player. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify the stop order (stop order for winning the bell) is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines to the player at a timing when the stop order advantageous to the player is determined when the notification target winning combination is won while the AT is not controlled. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (the combination of the three advantageous stop sequences for the player), and the six-choice combination (game). In a combination in which the stop order advantageous to the person is 6 ways, for example, RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, push order bells 1 to 6) of the present embodiment, the first stop operation is performed. That is, it is the timing at which it is determined that the advantageous win for the player will not stop, or the timing at which the second stop operation is performed.

  In addition, in the game after the winning of the special role has been carried over, the internal lottery result is that the winning role of the special role is satisfied and the predetermined navigation condition is satisfied. When it becomes, a push order command including a navigation number (“10” to “13”) that suggests a symbol forming one special winning combination is set.

[Navi notification performed by main controller 91]
Next, navigation notification performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment using the game auxiliary display device 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the configuration of the game auxiliary display device. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a notification mode by the navigation notification.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the game auxiliary display device 12 includes two display devices 12L and 12R capable of turning on / off the first to eighth segments, respectively, and a display capable of lighting each segment in red. It is a vessel. Each segment of the game auxiliary display device 12 is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in a predetermined output buffer provided on the game control board 40, so that the predetermined lighting mode is achieved. It is controlled to be turned on or off. As the game auxiliary display device 12, a display device or a liquid crystal display device capable of lighting each segment in any of a plurality of colors such as white, pink, yellow, orange, red, green, and blue is provided. You may use.

  By setting the navigation notification display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12 and perform the navigation notification. .. Further, by setting the payout amount display data as the lighting mode data in the output buffer, it is possible to perform the payout amount notification in which the number of medals awarded by the occurrence of the winning is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. By setting the error display data as the lighting mode data in the buffer, it is possible to perform the error notification in which the error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 when the error occurs.

  In a predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41, one display constituting the game auxiliary display 12 has a number, a lighting mode data for individually displaying a predetermined alphabetic character, and a predetermined symbol together with the number (this embodiment). In the example, the lighting mode data for displaying ".") Is stored in the lighting mode data table defined for each content to be displayed. Further, in the lighting mode data table, a number is assigned in advance for each lighting mode data, and one number is set to correspond to one lighting mode data. Then, when setting the lighting mode data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, the main control unit 41 displays the corresponding display device in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c provided corresponding to the display devices 12L and 12R. By setting the number corresponding to the display content to be displayed and executing the display data storage process, the display contents are displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R by the lighting mode data corresponding to the number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. It is possible. With this, by designating the number corresponding to the lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table, both when performing the navigation notification, when performing the payout number notification, and when performing the error notification, It is possible to display predetermined display contents on each of the display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 by using the common lighting mode data.

  In the display data storage process, the number of the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, the lighting mode data corresponding to the number is specified from the lighting mode data table, and the specified lighting mode data is displayed in the navigation notification display data and the payout number. The display data and the error display data are stored in the output buffer of the display corresponding to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. As a result, each segment of the corresponding display device is driven by the LED drive circuit 47 based on the lighting mode data stored in the output buffer, whereby the predetermined display content is displayed. Further, the main control unit 41 specifies the lighting mode (lighting or extinguishing) of each segment of the display device (8-bit data in which each bit indicates the lighting mode, for example, “00000001” (“1” indicates lighting). The lighting mode data is displayed without executing the display data storage process by storing the data shown in FIG. It is also possible to store it directly in the output buffer of the lighting device and display the display device based on the lighting mode data. Even if the lighting mode is not set in the lighting mode data table, the display devices 12L and 12R can display it. It can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when setting the navigation notification display data, the main control unit 41 outputs the navigation notification display data as the navigation notification display data when the navigation number is the standard push order number “0” and no navigation notification is performed. Set the initial value of the buffer. That is, by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and setting all the first to eighth segments of each of the display devices 12L and 12R to the off state, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden. Here, controlling the game auxiliary display device 12 to be non-display is also referred to as "clearing the display of the game auxiliary display device 12". Also, the navigation number is any of the navigation numbers "1" to "9" other than the standard push order, and when performing the navigation notification, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so as to display the number of the navigation number. The navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12 by setting the navigation notification display data in which the eighth segment of the display unit 12R is turned on and the other segments are turned off in the output buffer as well as the state. To control. In addition, if the special combination is won and the execution condition (in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is established after the special combination is won), the special condition is satisfied. When the navigation notification display data including the navigation number suggesting a symbol corresponding to the role is selected, each segment of the game auxiliary display device 12 is turned on so that the number of the navigation number is displayed, and the display device is displayed. By setting the navigation notification display data for turning on the eighth segment of 12R and turning off the other segments in the output buffer, it is controlled to display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display a navigation number that can specify a stop mode that is advantageous to the player and the number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small winning combination. Since the display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the payout number of medals do not include a common mode, whether the navigation number is displayed or not It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition as to whether the payout number is displayed as the content.

  As a result, the segments that are turned on for each stop order informed (left middle right, left middle, middle left, middle right left, right left middle, right middle left, left first stop, middle first stop, right first stop) Due to the different combination of, the navigation number is displayed so that it can be identified from the combination of the segments that are lit, and as a navigation notification, the stop order that is advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result The display 12 can be used for notification. In addition, if the special role has been won and the implementation conditions are met, a navigation number that suggests a design (blue 7, red 7, white 7, BAR) according to the winning special role By displaying (“10” to “13”) in a recognizable manner, a predetermined symbol is suggested as the timing of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player, and as a navigation notification, a special part can be won. The timing of possible stop operation can be notified using the game auxiliary display 12. Further, the main control unit 41 controls the 8th segment main of the display 12R together with the navigation number to a lighting state when performing the navigation notification, and turns off the 8th segment main of the display 12R when not performing the navigation notification. By controlling to, it is possible to recognize whether or not the navigation notification is executed by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12.

[Navi notification performed by sub-control unit 91]
The push-order commands set in the push-order command setting processing of this embodiment are subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the timer interrupt processing (main) being executed.

  Then, the sub control unit 91 determines that navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side based on the push order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. In addition, the navigation production is performed. When performing the navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the winning of the notification target combination is based on the second internal winning command, and that the navigation number is other than "0" based on the push order command. That is, when it is specified that the pressing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pressing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays a stopping order image showing the stopping order corresponding to the navigation number specified based on the pressing order command. To display. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 is caused to display an image suggesting a winning combination based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are elected as the notification target combination, the possibility of winning the bell is suggested by displaying the image of "bell", and the RT2 transition re-play 1 to 6, RT1 transition re-play 1 to 6, when the winning, based on the game state on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command and the like, there is a possibility of winning a re-play role The type of the group (either one of RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 or RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6) is specified, and a role included in the identified re-game combination (for example, in RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6, RT2 transition) In the re-game, RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6, by performing an effect according to the normal re-game, it is possible to suggest the possibility of winning a winning combination for the player.

  Further, as an effect according to the combination included in the re-game combination group in the navigation effect, for example, even when RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command setting process on the main control unit 41 side. , "2" indicating the winning of any one of RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 is uniformly set as the transmission winning number of the second internal winning command, The control unit 91 determines that the winning number for transmission is “2” based on the second internal winning command, and that the gaming state is RT2 based on the gaming state command and the like, and thus shifts to RT1. Replays 1 to 6 are identified as winning, and an image showing the stop order corresponding to the navigation number specified based on the push order command is displayed, along with an operation in the stop order for normal replay. By displaying an image suggesting the possibility of winning (in this embodiment, an image showing a combination of symbols constituting a normal replay), for a player among the roles included in the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6 It is possible to perform an effect according to an advantageous combination (in this embodiment, a combination for maintaining RT2).

  Further, when the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the special winning combination is won based on the first internal winning command as an effect that suggests the winning of the special winning combination in the navigation effect, then the above-described special winning combination is performed. When a predetermined number of games (five games in this embodiment) satisfying the condition for executing the navigation notification of No. have passed, a finalized notification for notifying that the special role has been won in the internal lottery (the special role for the liquid crystal display 51) Displays a message and an image indicating that he has won). Then, after the confirmation notification is made, that is, after the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special combination is satisfied, the navigation number specified based on the push-order command indicates the predetermined symbol of the special combination. In addition, by performing a stop operation at a timing at which a predetermined symbol can be stopped on the pay line LN according to the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect for promoting winning of a special role (for example, is specified based on the navigation number). The liquid crystal display 51 for displaying an image of a predetermined symbol is displayed). In this way, the sub-control unit 91 executes the predetermined number of games after the special combination is won based on the first internal winning command, and the main control unit 41 side establishes the condition for performing the navigation notification of the special combination. Since the confirmation notification is given when it is determined that the special combination has been performed, the main control unit 41 includes a navigation number that suggests a design in which the special combination can be won after the condition for executing the navigation notification of the special combination is satisfied. By transmitting the push order command, it is possible to cause the sub-control unit 91 to perform the special winning award promotion effect based on the navigation number after the confirmation notification is given.

[Game auxiliary display update process at game start]
The process of updating the display of the game auxiliary display 12 at the start of the game (game auxiliary display update process at the start of the game) will be described. The display on the game auxiliary display 12 is executed after the push-order command setting process is completed and before the stop switch 8 is operated.

  The display of the game auxiliary display device 12 is cleared when the BET process is performed. The game auxiliary display update process at the start of the game is executed by the main control unit 41 after the BET process is performed, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared, and the push order command setting process is completed.

  When the internal lottery is performed at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the result of the internal lottery set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and wins one of the special combinations (BB1 to 3, RB). And whether or not the condition for performing the navigation notification of a predetermined special role (in this embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 5 games) is established after the special role is won) is satisfied. If it is determined that the condition for executing the special notification of navigation is satisfied, a flag indicating that the notification of navigation is performed is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the condition for executing the special notification of navigation is satisfied. The above-described push-order command setting process is performed. By referring to the flag in the push order command setting process, the flag is after the execution condition of the navigation information of the special part is established, and the timing when the winning special part can be won, that is, the internal When the result of the lottery is out of alignment, the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the symbols constituting the winning special combination are set as the transmission navigation numbers. When the special combination is not won or when the execution condition is not established, it is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by the above-described push order command transmission process.

  When the special display is not won, the auxiliary display update process at the start of the game refers to the transmission navigation number (“0” to “9”) that can identify the reel stop order by the navigation notification, The navigation notification display data corresponding to the navigation number is set in the output buffer. On the other hand, when the special combination is elected and the execution condition is satisfied, the predetermined pattern which is set by the push order command transmission process and suggested by the navigation notification (in this embodiment, "blue 7 "Red 7" "White 7" "BAR" design) is referred to, and the navigation notification display data corresponding to the transmission navigation number is selected with reference to the transmission navigation number ("10" to "13"). And set it in the output buffer.

[Winning determination process]
After all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped after the start operation is performed, whether the main controller 41 has won a prize according to the combination of the symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R. A winning determination process for determining whether or not to execute is executed. In the winning determination process, for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols forming the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and the combination of the symbols forming the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that the winning number table is referred to, the winning number corresponding to the combination of symbols forming the stopped winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, while the combination of symbols forming the winning combination is set. When it is determined that the winning determination is not stopped, "0" indicating the deviation is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process ends.

[Game end processing]
After executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 performs a payout process when a small winning combination is won, and executes a game end process. The control content of the game end processing will be described with reference to FIG. The game end process is a process for executing a start effect, an end effect, an update of the game auxiliary display 12, and various effects according to a winning combination based on the determination result of the prize determination process. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the game end processing performed by the main control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the game is an AT end game (S250). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining AT games stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is one. When determining that the game is the AT end game, the main control unit 41 transmits an AT end freeze command to the sub control unit 91 (S253). Upon receiving the AT end freeze command, the sub control unit 91 executes the end effect. The end effect is an effect for notifying that the AT is ended. The ending effect of this embodiment is an effect of displaying a character such as "AT game end" on the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. Further, in the end effect, a predetermined sound (for example, ending sound) is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

  When determining that the game is not the AT end game, the main control unit 41 determines whether the game is in AT (S252). Specifically, it is determined whether the AT flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the main control unit 41 determines that it is not in AT, it executes a winning determination command setting process (Sh0). The prize determination command setting process is a process of storing data specifying the prize determination result in the command queue in order to transmit the result determined by the prize determination process to the sub control unit 91.

  When determining that the AT is in progress, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the player has won the RT2 transition replay combination (S300). Specifically, referring to the winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the winning number corresponding to the RT2 transition re-game combination is set. When determining that the player has not won the RT2 transition re-gaming combination, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process (Sh0). When determining that the player has won the RT2 transition re-game combination, the main control unit 41 transmits an AT start freeze command to the sub control unit 91 (S253).

  By receiving the AT start freeze command, the sub control unit 91 can specify that the AT start freeze has started and the period of the freeze. Upon receiving the AT start freeze command, the sub control unit 91 executes the start effect. The start effect is an effect for notifying that the ART state has been entered. The start effect of this embodiment is an effect of displaying a character such as “AT start!” On the liquid crystal display 51, as shown in FIG. Further, in the start effect, a predetermined sound (for example, fanfare sound) is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

  When the main control unit 41 transmits the AT end freeze command or the AT start freeze command to the sub control unit 91, the main control unit 41 sets a freeze flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (S302). Then, the loading prohibition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (S303). The non-insertable flag is a flag that can specify that the insertion of medals is not allowed (the insertion of medals is impossible). When the closing prohibition flag is set, processing for turning off the closing request LED 17 and the BET switch valid LED 21 is performed. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that it is impossible to insert medals. Further, a process of releasing the excitation of the flow path switching solenoid (flow path switching solenoid: off) is performed. When the flow path switching solenoid is deenergized, the flow path of the medal inserted from the medal insertion portion 4 is connected to the flow path on the side for discharging to the medal payout opening 9, and the medal insertion portion 4 inserts the medal. Even if it is ejected from the medal payout opening 9. In this way, even if a medal is inserted from the medal inserting section 4, the medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 9, and the medal insertion is not permitted.

  On the other hand, when the flow path switching solenoid is excited (flow path switching solenoid: on), it is possible to insert a medal (when allowing insertion of a medal). In this state, the flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 is connected to the flow path on the side stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are detected by the insertion medal sensor. After that, it is stored in the hopper tank 34a.

  The main control unit 41 sets a throw-in prohibition flag, and then executes a freeze that delays the progress of the game based on the freeze flag set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Freeze is a state in which an operation for advancing a game is not accepted (or delayed). The operations for advancing the normal game are bet operations (operations on the MAXBET switch 6), lever-on operations (operations on the start switch 7), and reel stop operations. In other words, during the freeze, the game does not proceed even if the player performs any operation (for example, the bet number is not set even if the bet operation is performed, and the reel is stopped even if the start switch 7 is operated. Is maintained and the reel does not rotate).

  After executing the freeze, the main control unit 41 determines whether 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of the freeze (S305). In S305, execution of the next process is awaited until 10 seconds have elapsed (NO in S305). When it is determined in S305 that 10 seconds have elapsed, the freeze flag is cleared (S306) and the freeze ends.

  When it is determined in S252 that it is not in AT, when it is determined in S300 that the player has not won the RT2 transition re-game combination, or after the processing of S306 ends, the prize determination command setting processing is executed (Sh0).

  After the prize determination command setting process is completed, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is updated to update the display on the game auxiliary display 12 (S307). Clearing the display on the game auxiliary display 12 means not displaying the display on the game auxiliary display 12. After clearing the display on the game auxiliary display 12, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been won (S308). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning number corresponding to the small winning combination is set by referring to the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When it is determined that the small winning combination has not been won (NO in S308), the process proceeds to S311.

  When determining that the small winning combination has been won (YES in S308), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the standby period has elapsed after clearing the display on the game auxiliary display device 12 (S309). In S309, the process waits until the waiting period elapses (NO in S309). When it is determined in S309 that the waiting period has elapsed, the main control unit 41 displays the payout amount on the game auxiliary display 12 (S310). After the processing of S310 is completed, the main control unit 41 clears the closing prohibition flag (S313). As a result, if the throw-in prohibition flag is set in S303, the throw-in prohibition flag is cleared and the insertion of medals is permitted. After the processing of S313 ends, the game end processing ends.

  When determining that the small winning combination has not been won (NO in S308), the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the winning combination has been won (S311). Specifically, the winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the winning number corresponding to the replay combination is set. If the main control unit 41 determines that the replay combination has not been won (NO in S311), it clears the insertion prohibition flag (S313) and ends the game end process.

  When the main control unit 41 determines that the player has won the replay combination (YES in S311), it sets the replay flag (S312) and ends the game end process. In the BET process, when the replay flag is set, the automatic BET process is performed and the replay flag is cleared. If the throw-disable flag is set when the automatic BET process is executed, the throw-disable flag is also cleared. Further, in S313, the throw-in flag is cleared only when the throw-in flag is set, and when the throw-in flag is not set, the process at the end of the game is ended without executing the process of S313. The automatic BET process is a BET process by a replay winning combination.

  When the main control unit 41 determines that the small winning combination has been won in the game end process (YES in S308), the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of the winning is set in the output buffer as payout number display data. Then, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (S310).

  A mode for displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a notification mode of the payout number. As shown in FIG. 21, the payout amount display data is set in the output buffer, each segment of the game auxiliary display 12 is turned on so as to display the payout number of medals, and other segments including the eighth segment are displayed. By setting the payout number display data in the off state in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display unit 12 is controlled to display the payout number of medals. For example, when eight medals are paid out, the first to seventh segments of the display 12R are turned on, while the first to eighth segments of the display 12L and the eighth segment of the display 12R are turned off. As a result, when the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the eighth segment of the display 12R is controlled to be in the off state, and thus the lighting mode and the number of medals to be paid out in the navigation notification as described above. The lighting mode is different from the lighting mode in the notification of No., so that it is not erroneously recognized whether the navigation notification is performed on the game auxiliary display 12 or the number of medals to be paid out is notified. There is.

[Prize determination command setting process]
Next, the control content of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the control contents of the winning determination command setting process performed by the main control unit.

  In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each special winning combination and a general winning combination, and a winning number table in which a winning number is set for each type of winning combination is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. There is.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the prize determination command setting process, the prize number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is acquired based on the result of the prize determination in the prize determination process (Sh1), and the prize determination command based on the prize number. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning determination command setting process is ended. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that it is the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT in the second byte.

  The prize determination command set in the prize determination command setting process is sequentially transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter.

  In this way, when the freeze control is executed, the prize determination command setting process is executed after the freeze control is performed, and when the freeze control is not executed, the prize determination is made when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped. Execute command setting processing. By executing the winning determination command setting process, the winning determination command including the winning number is set, and the winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

  In the prize determination command setting process of the present embodiment, the prize determination command including the prize number set in the RAM 41c in the prize determination process as it is is set in the command queue. The processing load can be reduced without performing conversion processing.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. It is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and execute the effect.

  A conventional slot machine has a configuration including a game control unit that controls a game and a production control unit that controls an effect, and the game control unit determines an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target winning combination is won. Accordingly, it is determined whether or not to control the AT where the navigation notification for notifying the operation procedure of the stop switch, which is advantageous for the player, is executed. When the AT is controlled, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result The internal winning command that can specify the, regardless of whether or not it is controlled by the AT, to the effect control unit, the effect control unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal win command, game control When controlled by the AT in the section, a navigation effect is provided to inform the player of an operation procedure advantageous to the player based on the specified internal lottery result.

  With such a configuration, the effect control unit can identify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command, regardless of whether the AT control is performed. By doing so, although the game control unit has not decided to control the AT, an operation procedure advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result is specified from the internal winning command, and the operation procedure is There is a possibility that the effect control unit may be notified.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, as an internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result, a first internal winning command that can specify the winning situation of the special role as the internal lottery result and the general winning combination. It is possible to set a second internal winning command that can specify the winning situation in the internal winning command setting process and send the set command to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result has become the notification target combination, it can be specified that the notification target combination has won, Since the second internal winning command related to the winning combination is set, the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command is irrespective of whether the main control unit 41 controls the AT. The common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether the AT is controlled without specifying the stop order advantageous to the corresponding player. Therefore, the second internal winning command is transmitted. It is possible to simplify the processing, and prevent the player from being informed of the stop order advantageous to the player by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlled even if the sub-control unit 91 is illegal.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as the notification target combination that the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, the push order replay (RT2 transition replay 1 to 6, RT1 transition replay 1 to 6) and the push order bell (push order). 1 to 6), the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command setting process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the notification target combination is a push order replay or a push order bell. The second internal winning command is set so that it can be specified whether or not it is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the sub-control unit 91 informs It is possible to specify whether the target winning combination is a push order replay or a push order bell, and the sub control unit 91 can also perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target winning combination.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT, and specifies the stop order advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed. Since the push-order command setting process for setting the possible push-order command is executed and the set push-order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 side for the player in the state where the navigation notification is executed It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes the push order replay and the push order bell as the notification target combination for executing the navigation notification, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the push order command setting process. In the state where the internal lottery result is push order replay and when the push order bell is displayed, that is, when the navigation notification is executed, the notification target combination won in the internal lottery is different type. Also, when the stop order that is advantageous to the player is common, a push order command including a common navigation number that can identify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is set, so that the types of push order commands can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies a stop order advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed. While setting the push-order command that includes the possible navigation number, in a state other than the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the stop order advantageous for the player cannot be specified. Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first stop on the left side) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination regardless of whether or not the navigation notification is executed. At times, it is possible to standardize the processing for setting the push order command including the navigation number.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped stepwise every time the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and a stop that is advantageous for the player. The order is determined before the operation of all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, that is, the operation of the third stop is completed. For example, when the push order bells 1 to 6 are won, it is determined whether or not the bell is won by performing the first stop operation, and when the RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are won, the first stop operation is performed. By being performed, it is determined whether or not the RT2 transition replay is won, and at the time of winning the RT1 transition replays 1 to 6, whether or not the normal replay is won by performing the second stop operation. Is decided. In the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 determines the stop order advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state where the navigation notification is executed, that is, After the operation of the first stop and the second stop is performed, by setting and transmitting a push order command including a navigation number that can identify the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result, It is advantageous for the player on the sub-control unit 91 side when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination while preventing the stop order that is advantageous for the player from being specified even if the control unit 91 is fraudulent. It is possible to perform an effect depending on whether the operation is performed in the stop order.

  When the start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the winning number. The internal winning flag is set, the navigation is informed, the command is created, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and controlled according to the above. In addition, as the internal winning command that can specify the internal lottery result, the first internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the special combination and the second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general winning combination are set. The command is set in the processing and the set command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target combination is won as the internal winning result is a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay (RT2 transition re-game 1-6, RT1 transition re-game 1-6 as the notification target combination) is: 2 to 14, and the winning numbers of the push order bells (push order bells 1 to 6) are 22 to 27. In the internal winning command setting process, the winning number set in the RAM 41c is in the predetermined numerical value range (2 to 14, 22 to 27) in a state other than the state in which the navigation is executed by being controlled by the AT. At this time, a second internal winning command that can specify that the winning combination has been specified but cannot specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player is set, and the set second internal winning command is sent to the sub-control unit 91. To send. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the main control unit 41 controls the AT, the second internal winning command does not specify the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. It is possible to prevent the stop order that is advantageous to the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlling even if the control section 91 side is fraudulent.

  In addition, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value within a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 determines that the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. It is possible to determine whether or not the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical value range assigned to the notification target combination. Therefore, the processing when transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 includes a push order replay and a push order bell as the notification target combination for performing the navigation notification, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is the push order replay, That is, consecutive numbers in the first numerical range (2 to 14) are assigned as the winning numbers of the respective lottery target combinations whose internal lottery results are RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 and RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6. In addition, as the winning number when the internal lottery result becomes the push order bell, that is, the winning number of each lottery target combination whose internal lottery result is the push order bell 1 to 6, the second numerical range (22 to 27) is consecutive. The numerical value to be assigned is assigned. Therefore, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the main control unit 41 pushes the internal lottery result depending on whether the winning number is in the first numerical value range or the second numerical value range. It is possible to determine whether it is a normal replay or a push order bell. Therefore, the process of setting the second internal winning command in the internal winning command setting process can be simplified.

  Further, the main control section 41 of the present embodiment can control to a plurality of game states including the first state (RT1) and the second state (RT2, RT3). Further, in each game state, the type of push-order replay as the notification target combination determined in the internal lottery is different (in the present embodiment, for example, in RT1, RT2 transition replays 1 to 6 are the selection target combinations. Then, RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are not lottery target combinations, and in RT2 and RT3, RT1 transition re-games 1 to 6 are lottery target roles, while RT2 transition re-games 1 to 6 are not lottery target roles. , The gaming state RT1 and RT2, 3 differ in the type of the notification target winning combination that is the target of the internal winning). And the winning number when the internal lottery result is push order replay in the game state of the first state, and the winning number when the internal lottery result is push order replay in the game state of the second state, All are assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 14). Therefore, in the internal winning command setting process, it is possible to standardize the process for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is the push order replay in both the first state and the second state.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process, when the internal lottery result is a winning combination other than the notification target winning combination or a loss in the internal winning command setting processing, the main control unit 41 responds to the internal drawing selection result. The second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 15 to 21, 28 in the present embodiment) is set, and when the internal lottery result is the push order replay that is the notification target combination, the first internal winning command is set. When the internal lottery result is the push order bell which is the notification target combination, including the one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 14), the second numerical range (22 to 27). ), A second internal winning command including one winning number (22 in this embodiment) is set. As a result, in a state in which the internal lottery result is a combination other than the notification target combination or a combination other than the notification target combination in the state in which the AT is not controlled, the second lottery including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result. Send an internal winning command. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, the process of creating and transmitting the second internal winning command can be made common.

[Timing for switching the display of the game auxiliary display 12 when the freeze is not executed]
Next, the timing when the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 according to the progress status of the game and the like when the freeze is not executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 23A, when the bet number of 1 or more is set to start the game, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to display the game auxiliary display. All the segments of the container 12 are turned off to control the display. Then, when the start operation is performed in a state where the bet number of the specified number is set, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R related to the game is started. At this time, the navigation number "0" in the standard pressing order is set by referring to the predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and when no navigation notification is given, all segments of the game auxiliary display 12 are turned off. maintain. Then, after all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped after the third stop operation is performed, if a prize for one of the small wins is generated, the number of medals to be paid out by the prize. Is set as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Then, by setting the bet number of 1 or more to start the next game, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 is initialized again, and the game auxiliary display device 12 is controlled to be hidden. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is not performed, the game auxiliary display device 12 is controlled to be hidden for a period from when the bet number of 1 or more is set to when the payout of medals is started by winning. , When all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started, a bet number of 1 or more is set, or a waiting condition (no operation for a certain period of time, settlement operation is performed). That is, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as a payout number display for a period until the standby state is established. When the third stop operation is performed and all reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, if the re-playing combination is winning, or if no winning has occurred, game assistance By not setting the payout amount display data in the output buffer of the display device 12, the betting number of 1 or more is set in order to maintain the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 in a non-display state and start one game. The lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is controlled so as not to be displayed for a period from the time until the bet number is set to start the next game, that is, for the entire period in one game.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23B, in the case of performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 performs the start operation with the prescribed number of bets set, and then the reel 2L related to the game. When the rotation control of 2C and 2R is started, one of the navigation numbers “1” to “9” is set as the transmission navigation number by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c and by the push-order command transmission process described above. If the navigation information of the special part is fulfilled and any of the navigation numbers “10” to “13” is set as the transmission navigation number, the corresponding navigation number is set. The navigation notification display data to be displayed is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. After that, the stop switch for the third stop is operated, and when the stop switch is released, it is determined whether or not any winning has occurred, and if the freeze is not executed, the game auxiliary display is displayed. The output buffer of the device 12 is initialized to control the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 so as not to be displayed, and thereafter, the game auxiliary display device 12 waits for a predetermined waiting period. Then, after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, if a small winning combination has been won, the number of medals to be paid out by winning is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as payout number display data, and the game is played. The number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 12. As a result, in the game in which the navigation notification is given, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed for a period from when the reel starts to rotate with the start of the game to when the stop switch for the third stop operation is released. It is controlled so that the navigation number is continuously displayed as a navigation notification. When the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is once controlled to be non-display by initializing the output buffer, when all reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the payout of medals is started. From the above, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display the number of medals as a payout number display for a period until the bet number of 1 or more is set.

  Next, the display on the liquid crystal display when the navigation notification is performed will be described with reference to FIG. When the game start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 transmits the above-described push order command to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, and when it is specified that the navigation notification is performed based on the navigation number, the sub control unit 91 specifies the navigation number based on the navigation number. A navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode is executed. In the navigation effect, for example, a number indicating the stop order based on the navigation number is displayed at the position corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, or the stop operation based on the navigation number is performed. An advantageous operation mode is suggested by displaying an image indicating timing (for example, an image of “red 7”) in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51.

  In the internal lottery, when any one of a plurality of special combinations (RBB, BB1, BB2) is won, the main control unit 41 that controls the progress of the game wins the game auxiliary display unit 12. A navigation number that can identify a special character is displayed (see FIGS. 13 and 19). Therefore, the player can identify the type of special winning role by confirming the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12.

  Further, the sub control unit 91 can specify the navigation number based on the push order command transmitted from the main control unit 41. Then, as a navigation effect that suggests an advantageous operation mode specified based on the navigation number, a special role winning promotion effect that promotes winning of a special role is performed. The special role winning promotion effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a character image "Aim for Blue 7!" In the display area 51a. That is, a different navigation number is set for each type of special role, and the advantageous operation mode specified for each navigation number is different, so the player wins based on the navigation effect displayed in the display area 51a. It is possible to specify the type of special role that is present.

  In this way, the game auxiliary display unit 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 and the liquid crystal display unit 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91 respectively display information capable of specifying the type of the special winning role. Therefore, it is possible to display the information capable of specifying the type of the winning special combination in association with the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51. As a result, when the navigation number indicating the winning of one special winning combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the liquid crystal display 51 also displays the navigation effect for winning the special winning corresponding to the navigation number. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved as compared with the case where the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51 display unrelated ones.

  After starting the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed until the release of the stop switch for the third stop operation. During the period, the navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch, which is advantageous for the player, is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, so that the period from the start to the end of the game It is possible to continuously let the player recognize an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is information regarding the result of the game as the predetermined content, and the game auxiliary display 12 used to display the number of medals to be paid out to the player due to the occurrence of a prize at the end of the game. As a display content different from the predetermined content, a navigation number capable of identifying the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch advantageous for the player is displayed, and the stop switch advantageous for the player is displayed. While the advantageous operation mode is displayed during the game, the number of payouts as the predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, so that the display period of the navigation number and the display period of the number of payouts overlap on the game auxiliary display unit 12. You don't have to.

[Timing of switching display of game auxiliary display 12 at AT start]
Next, the timing at which the main controller 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 in accordance with the progress of the game when the AT is started and the freeze is executed will be described with reference to FIG. .. In addition, the control contents when the freeze is executed will also be described.

  FIG. 24A shows a reel and effect screen (screen displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51), FIG. 24A shows control contents, and FIG. 24C shows game assistance. The display content of the display 12 is shown. Further, regarding the screens showing the reels and the effect screen, the upper part shows the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, and the lower part shows the reel 2.

  FIG. 24A illustrates a case where the RT2 transition re-game combination is won during the AT and the RT1. As shown in FIG. 24 (A), the sub-control unit 91 executes a navigation effect for notifying (displaying) an operation procedure (in the example of FIG. 24, middle right left) corresponding to the selected RT2 transition re-game combination. Further, as shown in FIG. 24C, the navigation effect is executed, and “4.” representing the stop operation mode of “middle right left” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 (see FIG. 19).

  It is operated according to the operation procedure informed by this navigation effect, and when the operation of the stop switch of the third stop operation is released, if the player wins the RT2 transition re-gaming combination, it is controlled to RT2. "Red 7, Lip, Lip" written on the reel of FIG. 24 (B) indicates that "Red 7, Lip, Lip" are aligned on the pay line LN. Here, the lip indicates that it is the replay a or the replay b. In addition, in the present embodiment, the RT2 transition re-gaming combination is won when "red 7-replay a / replay b-replay a / replay b" are lined up on the pay line LN. Here, “/” means “or”, and “replay a / replay b” indicates that either symbol of replay a and replay b may be stopped on the pay line LN. ing. That is, the combination of symbols stopped on the pay line LN shown in FIG. 24 (B) indicates that the RT2 transition re-gaming combination has won. As shown in FIG. 24 (C), when the operation of the stop switch of the third stop operation is released, and at the timing when the display result of the RT2 transition replay is derived, the navigation effect is switched to the start effect. Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, the navigation effect is switched to the start effect and the freeze in S304 of FIG. 20 is also executed. Further, the execution time of the start effect is the same as the execution time of the freeze, and is 10 seconds in the present embodiment (see S305 in FIG. 20). Here, as shown in FIG. 24C, at the timing of switching from the navigation effect to the start effect, the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 is maintained while the freeze is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the player is in AT and at RT1 and the RT2 transition replay is won (YES in S300 of FIG. 20), the medal insertion is not permitted ( (S303) Freezing is started (S304). The non-permission of medal insertion means that the insertion prohibition flag is set and the flow path switching solenoid is released (off). Also, when the freeze is started, the settlement operation is also not permitted. Here, the settlement operation is not permitted means that the settlement process is not executed even if the player performs the settlement operation.

  When the player wins the RT2 transition re-gaming combination and the freeze for 10 seconds ends, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared as shown in FIG. 24C, and the automatic BET is displayed as shown in FIG. The process is executed. Even during this automatic BET processing, medal insertion and settlement operations are not allowed. When the automatic BET processing is completed, the replay flag set in S312 of FIG. 20 is cleared, and the insertion prohibition flag set in S303 of FIG. 20 is cleared, so that the medal insertion and the settlement operation are permitted. Allowing the insertion of medals means that the insertion prohibition flag is cleared and the flow path switching solenoid is excited (on). In addition, that the settlement operation is permitted means that the settlement processing is executed when the player performs the settlement operation.

  When the player wins the re-gaming combination, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 remains cleared, so that the display on the game auxiliary display 12 remains cleared during the BET processing as shown in FIG. Becomes

  After that, when the player turns on the lever, the AT is started, as shown in FIG. In the example of FIG. 24 (D), during AT, the sub-control unit 91 executes the AT effect. Here, the in-AT effect is an effect that is executed after the start effect is finished. In the game in which the number of remaining AT games is notified in the upper left area of the liquid crystal display 51, and in the game in which the press order combination is won, It is an effect for notifying the operation procedure corresponding to the pressing forward combination. In addition, while the production in AT is being executed, as shown in FIG. 24C, a stop operation mode corresponding to the selected push order combination is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. The timing of changing the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to the display of the stop operation mode is performed after the lever-on operation is performed and the navigation number is set by the push order command setting process.

[Timing for switching the display of the game auxiliary display 12 at the end of AT]
Next, the timing at which the main control unit 41 switches the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 according to the progress of the game and the like when the AT is finished and the freeze is executed will be described with reference to FIG. .. In addition, the control contents when the freeze is executed will also be described.

  FIG. 25A shows the reel and effect screen (screen displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51), FIG. 25A shows the control content, and FIG. 25C shows the game assistance. The display content of the display 12 is shown.

  FIG. 25 illustrates a case where the push order bell that can be won in RT3 or RT2 is won in the final game of AT. As shown in FIG. 24 (A), when the push order bell is won as the AT production, the sub control unit 91 notifies the operation procedure (correct answer procedure) corresponding to the selected push order bell. In the example of FIG. 25A, the operation procedure is “middle right left”. Further, as shown in FIG. 25C, the operation procedure is displayed in the display area 51a of the liquid crystal display 51, and "4." representing the "middle right left" stop operation mode is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. (See FIG. 19).

  When the player who visually recognizes these notifications operates according to the notified operation procedure and releases the stop switch of the third stop operation, as shown in FIG. 25B, for example, a bell is won. Can be made Further, in FIG. 25A, since it is the final game of AT, the fact that the number of remaining AT games is 0 is notified by the effect during AT. Further, "bell, bell, bell" described on the reel of FIG. 25 (B) indicates that "red 7, lip, lip" are aligned on the pay line LN. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the bell is won when "bell-bell-bell" is lined up on the pay line LN. That is, the combination of symbols stopped on the pay line LN shown in FIG. 25B indicates that the bell has won. As shown in FIG. 25 (C), when the operation of the stop switch of the third stop operation is released, and at the timing when the display result of the bell is derived, the in-AT effect is switched to the end effect.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25A, in the AT end game (YES in S250 of FIG. 20), the insertion of medals is not permitted (S303), and the freeze is started (S304). Here, as shown in FIG. 25C, the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 is maintained at the timing when the AT effect is switched to the end effect and the freeze is executed. When the AT end game is over, the freeze is executed regardless of the display result of the AT end game.

  The freeze execution period is 10 seconds (see S305 in FIG. 20). When the freeze for 10 seconds is completed, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is cleared as shown in FIG. 25C (S307 in FIG. 20). Then, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (c), when a predetermined waiting period has passed since the display on the game auxiliary display 12 was cleared (see S309 in FIG. 20), the game auxiliary display 12 The number of medals to be paid out is displayed (S310 in FIG. 20), the replay flag set in S312 in FIG. 20 is cleared, and the non-insertion flag set in S303 in FIG. 20 is cleared. Settlement operation is allowed. In the present embodiment, the bell combination that is won by the operation procedure on the right, middle, and left is a small combination with a payout number of 8. Therefore, “8” is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12.

  After that, when the player performs a bet number setting operation, the display on the game auxiliary display device 12 is cleared as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the player performs a lever-on operation, as shown in FIG. 25 (D), it is controlled to be non-AT. In the example of FIG. 25D, the normal effect is executed by the sub control unit 91 during non-AT. Here, the normal effect is an effect executed during non-AT. In the example of FIG. 25D, the background image of the sun is displayed during the normal effect. The normal effect is an effect executed after the end effect is finished. Further, during the normal effect after the end of AT, since the condition for executing the special notification of the navigation is not satisfied, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 remains cleared.

  In this way, the display of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained for 10 seconds (delay period) when the freeze control is performed. Therefore, the player can confirm the stop procedure for deriving the winning combination for 10 seconds. Further, while the freeze control is performed, the display of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is not changed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that controls other than the freeze control may be performed. Further, while the freeze control is performed, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not changed, so that the player can concentrate on the game during the freeze without being distracted by the display on the game auxiliary display 12. In particular, when the start effect or the end effect is executed during the period in which the freeze is being executed, the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 is not changed while the start effect or the end effect is being executed. Or you can draw attention to the end production. Furthermore, while the freeze is being executed, the insertion of the game medium is not allowed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game medium from being thrown in as much as possible during the start effect or the end effect that is performed during the freeze execution, and it is possible to further draw attention to the start effect or the end effect. Further, during the freeze, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained, and the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Therefore, it is possible to confirm the operation mode for winning the lottery target combination advantageous to the player during the freeze, and the player can confirm whether or not the operation performed by himself / herself was correct.

  In the present embodiment, the start timing of the end effect is the winning of the Bell role, but it may be triggered by the end of the AT game, and the re-gaming role is set as the lottery target role of the navigation target, The finish effect or the like may be executed in response to winning the re-playing combination in the final game of AT.

[Song selection screen]
Further, in order to excite the game in AT, the sub-control unit 91 outputs music during AT. In the present embodiment, when the start effect is completed, a music selection screen that allows selection of music output during AT is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 15%). On the song selection screen, a plurality of song names of selectable songs are displayed. When such a song selection screen is displayed, the player can select and decide a song. Further, the sub control unit 91 executes control based on data that can specify control according to options stored in the RAM 91c. Here, since the option is music, the music is output based on the music data stored in the RAM 91c. Further, for example, when the music selection screen is displayed, data regarding the music selected by the player is stored in the RAM 91c. For example, when the music piece data is data related to the music piece A, the sub control unit 91 outputs the music piece A based on the music piece A data. If the music piece data is data related to the music piece B, the sub control unit 91 outputs the music piece B based on the music piece B data. When the music piece data is data relating to the music piece C, the sub control unit 91 outputs the music piece C based on the music piece C data.

  FIG. 26 shows a case where the music selection screen is displayed when the start effect is finished, and is a diagram for explaining the time when the music selection screen is displayed when no power interruption occurs. is there. The description of FIGS. 26A, 26B, and 26A is the same as the description of FIGS. 24B, 24C, and 24B, respectively.

  It is assumed that the music selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. On the music selection screen of FIG. 26C, music A, music B, and music C are displayed as options. When the song selection screen is displayed, the player moves the cursor by operating the left stop switch. When the music selection screen is displayed, the cursor is placed on the music A displayed at the top. After that, when the left stop switch is operated, the cursor is set to the song B which is one lower option. Further, when the left stop switch is operated, the cursor is set to the song C which is one lower option. Further, when the left stop switch is operated, the cursor is set to the song A which is the uppermost option.

  As described above, when the music selection screen is displayed, it can be said that the selection operation of the options (music) can be accepted. When the music selection screen is displayed, the music data of a predetermined music (default music) of the music A to music C is stored in the RAM 91c (see parentheses in FIG. 26C). In the present embodiment, the predetermined song is song A.

  FIG. 26D is a diagram showing that the player operates the left stop switch so that the cursor is aligned with the song C (the song C is selected). When the production switch 56 is operated while the music selection screen is displayed, the option (music) to which the cursor is placed (selected) is determined.

  FIG. 26 (E) is a diagram showing that the song has been decided. As shown in FIG. 26 (E), by thickening the frame line of the cursor, it is notified that the music is decided. Further, when the music is determined, the sound effect indicating that the music is determined is output from the speakers 53 and 54.

  When the lever-on operation is performed after the screen of FIG. 26 (E) is displayed, the AT is controlled, the AT effect is executed, and the reel is rotated. FIG. 26 (F) shows an effect screen of the effect during AT. In the example of FIG. 26, the determined song title (song C) is displayed in addition to the number of remaining AT games.

[If a power failure occurs while the song selection screen is displayed]
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, a case will be described in which power failure occurs when the music selection screen is displayed. When the music selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the music A data is stored in the RAM 91c as described in FIG. 26 (C). After that, as shown in FIG. 27D, it is assumed that the power failure occurs when the music selection screen is displayed (when the player is selecting a music). In FIG. 27 (D), it is assumed that power failure occurs when the song C is selected.

  Then, it is assumed that the power is restored. In this case, the control returns to the state controlled by the AT (the state in which the AT production is executed). Here, regarding the output of the music, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the music in the performance in the AT based on the music data stored in the RAM 91c, and the music title corresponding to the music data is displayed. Here, since the song data stored in the RAM 91c is the data for the song A (see FIG. 27C), the song A is output and the song name of the song A is displayed in the AT production. It In this way, when the song selection screen is displayed and a power failure occurs, and when the power is restored, regardless of which song is selected, a predetermined song (this implementation In the form, the song A) is returned in a determined state.

[When the power is cut off after the song is decided]
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a case will be described in which a power failure occurs after a song is determined on the song selection screen. When the music selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 28 (C), the music A data is stored in the RAM 91c as described in FIG. 26 (C). After that, it is assumed that the player has selected a song as shown in FIG. 28 (D) and that the song C has been decided as shown in FIG. 28 (E). In this case, the data (for example, song A data) stored in the RAM 91c is erased and the song C data is stored. In other words, the song A data is updated to the song C data. It is assumed that the power failure occurs after the song C is determined. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the power failure occurs when three games have been exhausted from the time of being controlled by the AT, that is, when the number of remaining AT games is 47.

  Then, it is assumed that the power is restored. In this case, the control returns to the state controlled by the AT (the state in which the AT production is executed). Here, regarding the output of the music, the sub-control unit 91 outputs the music in the performance in the AT based on the music data stored in the RAM 91c, and the music title corresponding to the music data is displayed. Here, since the song data stored in the RAM 91c is data about the song C (see FIG. 28E), the song C is output and the song name of the song C is displayed in the AT production. It

  When a power failure occurs while the music selection screen is displayed, when the power failure is restored, the option selected at the time of the power failure is selected (for example, the state shown in FIG. 26D). It is conceivable to execute a predetermined return control in which the return is performed in step (4). However, in the case of such a predetermined return control, when the power failure occurs, the music selection screen was displayed, and the options selected on the music selection screen are stored in the RAM 91c (backup process). Need to do). Therefore, the processing at the time of power failure is increased and the capacity of the RAM 91c is used to a large extent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the song A data is stored in the RAM 91c when the song selection screen is displayed (FIGS. 26C and 27C). When a power failure occurs while the music selection screen is displayed, it is not necessary to store the selected option or the like in the RAM 91c, and when the power is restored, based on the music A data stored in the RAM 91c, The song A is output and the next production, that is, the production in AT is executed, and the process returns (see FIG. 27F). That is, regardless of which song is selected on the song selection screen that was displayed when the power failure occurred, a predetermined song (song A in this embodiment) is determined. Return. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the increase in the processing when the power failure occurs and reduce the capacity used in the RAM 91c.

[Notification mode selection screen]
In addition, the additional lottery may be executed during AT, and the additional lottery result effect is performed to notify (notify) the result of the additional lottery. In the present embodiment, when the start effect is completed, a notification mode selection screen for selecting the notification mode output during AT is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 15%). On the notification mode selection screen, a plurality of notification mode names of selectable notification modes are displayed. When such a notification mode selection screen is displayed, the player can select a notification mode.

  In the present embodiment, there are a chance notification, a complete notification, and a subsequent notification as the notification modes of the additional lottery result effect. Here, the chance notification is a notification mode in which a precursor effect (for example, a battle effect) is executed over a predetermined period, the precursor effect ends, and a result effect that notifies the result of the additional lottery is executed. .. The predetermined period may be a predetermined time or a predetermined number of games (one or more games). The chance notification is used regardless of whether or not the additional lottery is won. When the additional lottery is won, a result effect is executed to notify that the additional lottery was won. The result effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a character such as "Additional prize! Congratulations". On the other hand, when the additional lottery has not been won (in the case of non-winning), a result effect is executed to notify that the additional lottery has not been won. The result effect is, for example, an effect of displaying a character such as "Don't win the prize! Sorry!". It can be said that the notification of a chance is a notification mode that gives a sense of tension in the sign presentation.

  The complete notification is a notification mode in which the precursor effect and the effect effect are executed when the additional winning is won, and the precursor effect and the result effect are not executed when the additional winning is not won. Since the complete notification is a mode that is used only when the player wins in addition, it can be said that the complete notification is a mode in which the player feels secure.

  The posterior notification is a notification mode in which only the result effect is executed without executing the precursor effect. The posterior notice may be a mode used both when the player wins the addition and when the player does not win the addition. Further, the notice may be used when the additional winning is won and is not used when the additional winning is not won. Further, the posterior notification may be executed at the timing when the display result is derived (the timing when the three reels are stopped), or may be executed at another timing. In addition, since the posterior notification does not execute the precursor effect, it can be said that the posterior notification is a notification mode in which the player can have an unexpected feeling.

  Further, the sub-control unit 91 executes control based on the data stored in the RAM 91c and capable of specifying control according to the option. Here, since the option is the notification mode, the result of the additional lottery is notified in the notification mode based on the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c. For example, when the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c is data related to a chance notification (chance notification data), the sub control unit 91 determines the additional lottery based on the opportunity notification data (in the mode of the chance notification). Execute result production. When the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c is data related to complete notification (complete notification data), the sub control unit 91 determines the additional lottery based on the complete notification data (in the complete notification mode). Execute result production. When the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c is the data related to the posterior notification (the posterior notification data), the sub control unit 91 executes the additional lottery result effect based on the posterior notification data.

  FIG. 29 shows a case where the notification mode selection screen is displayed when the start effect is finished, and is a diagram for explaining the time when the notification mode selection screen is displayed. The description of FIGS. 29A, 29B, and 29A is the same as the description of FIGS. 24B, 24C, and 24A, respectively.

  It is assumed that the notification mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. On the notification mode selection screen of FIG. 29 (C), the options of opportunity notification, complete notification, and subsequent notification are displayed. When the notification mode selection screen is displayed, the player moves the cursor by operating the left stop switch. When the notification mode selection screen is displayed, the cursor is aligned with the chance notification displayed at the top. Then, when the left stop switch is actuated, the cursor is aligned with the one lower option, the full announcement. In addition, when the left stop switch is operated, the cursor is aligned with the one lower option, post notification. Furthermore, when the left stop switch is operated, the cursor is aligned with the chance notification, which is the top option.

  As described above, when the notification mode selection screen is displayed, it can be said that the selection operation of the options (notification mode) can be accepted. Further, when the notification mode selection screen is displayed, the notification mode data of a predetermined notification mode (default notification mode) of the chance notification to the subsequent notification is stored in the RAM 91c (parentheses in FIG. 29C). See note). In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the predetermined notification mode is an opportunity notification.

  FIG. 29D is a diagram showing that the player operates the left stop switch so that the cursor is aligned with the posterior notification (the posterior notification is selected). When the notification mode selection screen is displayed and the production switch 56 is operated, the selected option (notification mode) to which the cursor is placed is determined. When the effect switch 56 is operated, the frame line of the cursor becomes thick to notify that the notification mode has been determined. The sound effect indicating the determination is output from the speakers 53 and 54. Then, when the lever-on operation is performed, the AT control is performed, the AT effect is executed, and the reel rotates. At this time, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the determined notification mode name (later notification) in addition to the number of remaining AT games. Note that this notification mode may not be displayed.

  In FIG. 29 (D), it is assumed that the power failure occurs when the notification mode selection screen is displayed (when the player selects the notification mode). Then, it is assumed that the power is restored. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (F), the control is returned to the state controlled by the AT (the state in which the AT effect is executed). Here, regarding the notification mode, the sub control unit 91 determines the notification mode based on the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c, and displays the notification mode name corresponding to the notification mode data. Here, since the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c is data about the chance notification (see FIG. 29C), the opportunity notification is determined and the notification mode name of the opportunity notification is displayed. During the AT, the additional lottery result effect is executed in the form of notification of a chance. As described above, when the notification mode selection screen is displayed, power failure occurs, and when the power failure is restored, the predetermined notification mode regardless of which notification mode is selected. The process returns in the state where (in this embodiment, the notification of the chance) is determined.

  When the power failure is restored after the notification mode is determined, the determined notification mode is determined and the corresponding notification mode name is displayed when the power is restored. More specifically, when the notification mode is determined, the data (for example, chance notification data) stored in RAM 91c is erased, and the determined notification mode data is stored. Then, it is assumed that the power is restored. At this time, the sub control unit 91 determines the notification mode based on the notification mode data stored in the RAM 91c, and displays the notification mode name corresponding to the notification mode data.

  When the notification mode selection screen is displayed, the player selects and determines the notification mode, whereby the notification mode of the additional lottery result effect executed during AT is determined. Further, when a power failure occurs while the notification mode selection screen is displayed, when the power failure is restored, the option selected at the time of the power failure is selected (for example, FIG. 29D). It is conceivable to execute a predetermined return control for returning in the state (1). However, in the case of such a predetermined return control, when the power failure occurs, the notification mode selection screen was displayed, and the options selected on the notification mode selection screen are stored in the RAM 91c ( Backup process is required). Therefore, the processing at the time of power failure is increased and the capacity of the RAM 91c is used to a large extent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the chance notification data is stored in the RAM 91c when the notification mode selection screen is displayed. When a power failure occurs while the notification mode selection screen is displayed, it is not necessary to store the selected options or the like in the RAM 91c, and when the power failure is restored, based on the chance notification data stored in the RAM 91c. , Opportunity notification has been decided, and the next production, that is, the production in AT, is executed, and the process returns. In other words, a predetermined notification mode (in this embodiment, a notification of a chance) is determined regardless of which notification mode is selected on the notification mode selection screen that was displayed when the power cut occurred. Return in a closed state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the increase in the processing when the power failure occurs and reduce the capacity used in the RAM 91c. Further, when the power is restored, instead of returning in the display state of the notification mode selection screen, it is returned in the state in which the AT production which is the state next to the display of the notification mode selection screen is being executed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress.

[About rotation control]
Next, the rotation control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R performed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment will be described based on FIGS. 30 to 33.

  Here, the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can retain the stored contents by being supplied with power from the backup power supply even when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power failure is detected based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48, the control state in the main control unit 41 set in the RAM 41c is changed. The power interruption process is performed so that the power can be restored when the power is restored, and then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control is performed in the control state when the power interruption is detected. You are ready to get started.

  Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the present embodiment is adapted to be rotated by a corresponding reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4). The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are composed of hybrid type stepping motors that make one revolution at a cycle of 336 steps (0 to 335), and are controlled by the phase signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 under the control of the main controller 41. The excitation state of each excitation phase (four phases of φ1 to φ4 in this embodiment) in the stepping motor is rotated by switching between excitation and non-excitation in a predetermined order.

  The main controller 41 sets the number of steps when the reel reference position is detected by the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R provided on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to 0, and rotates the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. To control. In addition, in the above-described main processing, an excitation pattern for rotating the reel in a predetermined manner is set. In the timer interrupt process (main), a control signal for instructing the excitation state of each excitation phase of the stepping motor specified based on the excitation pattern and the number of steps from the reel reference position is output to the motor drive circuit 45. Then, the motor drive circuit 45 outputs a phase signal indicating the excitation state based on the control signal to each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R. As a result, in each reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R, the excitation state of the excitation phase of the reel motor is switched according to the phase signal, and the reel motor is controlled in a predetermined rotation mode. 2R controls rotation.

  The reel motor excitation pattern set by the main control unit 41 in the main process is not directly related to the game excitation pattern group for controlling the rotation of the reel according to the game progress state and the game progress state. For example, a non-game excitation pattern group for performing an effect using a reel is included, and these excitation patterns are predetermined in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Then, in the game excitation pattern group of the reel motor excitation patterns, a starting pattern for starting the rotation of the reel in a stopped state to accelerate it to a predetermined constant speed state and a predetermined constant speed state It includes a constant speed pattern for continuing the rotation of the reel accelerated to the constant speed state and a stop pattern for stopping the reel rotating in the predetermined constant speed state in a predetermined number of steps.

  In each excitation pattern, the excitation state (excitation or non-excitation) of each excitation phase of the reel motor is determined for each number of steps from the reference position of the reel. The rotation of the reel can be controlled in a predetermined rotation mode by switching to the excitation state determined in the order of the numbers. The main control unit 41 sets the starting pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor for each reel 2L, 2C, 2R, and then switches the excitation pattern to the constant speed pattern to start the rotation of the reel in the stopped state. It is possible to perform start control for accelerating the rotation to a predetermined constant speed. Further, by repeatedly setting the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern of the reel motor, it is possible to perform the constant speed rotation control for maintaining the rotation of the reel at the constant speed rotation. For the reel on which the stop switch is operated, the reel motor excitation pattern is switched to the stop pattern at a predetermined timing to perform rotation stop control for stopping the reel at a predetermined stop position according to the timing at which the stop switch is operated. It is possible.

  Further, the predetermined area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is updated in correspondence with the number of steps for exciting the reel motor, and is initialized each time the reel reference position is detected, so that the reels 2L, 2C ,. There is provided a step number counter for counting the number of steps after the reel reference position is detected for 2R. When the value of the step number counter for the spinning reel is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of steps (at least the number of steps set to 336 steps required for the reel to make one round, for example, 400 steps), The main controller 41 determines that the reel has an abnormal rotation. Resetting the reel motor excitation pattern for the reel determined to have an abnormal rotation to the starting pattern, changing the reel motor excitation state from the beginning of the starting pattern, and restarting the reel rotation. Is possible.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30A, the main control unit 41 sets a starting pattern as an excitation pattern of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R with the start operation of the game. The main control unit 41 starts the rotation of each reel by changing the excitation state of each excitation phase of each reel motor in the stopped state based on the starting pattern. Further, when the starting pattern is set as the excitation pattern, the step number counter is initialized to start counting the number of steps. Then, the rotation of the reel is controlled to a predetermined constant speed rotation by switching the excitation pattern from the starting pattern to the constant speed pattern. After that, when the reel is rotating normally, the reel reference position is detected by the reel making at least one round before the step number counter reaches the above-described predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps). It will be. Then, for all the spinning reels, the activation condition for validating the acceptance of the stopping operation of the spinning reels is set by switching the excitation pattern of the reel motor to the constant speed pattern and detecting the reel reference position. It is determined that it has been established. When the activation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the spinning reel, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated in this state, so that the corresponding reel is operated. Effectively accepts the stop operation for, and starts the stop control for stopping the rotation of the reel.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30B, the main control unit 41 starts the rotation of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R in the stopped state, and then the reel reference position is changed for at least one of the reels. When the number of steps counter reaches a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 steps) without being detected, that is, the number of steps after the start of rotation or the last reel reference position is detected is required for the reel to make one round. If the number of steps exceeds the number of steps, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the rotation state of the reel, restart control is performed, and the reel motor excitation pattern is set to the start pattern again for the reel. The excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the beginning of the starting pattern to restart the rotation. Further, when the restart control is performed, the step number counter is initialized. After that, when the reel is normally rotated, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps). Then, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant-speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected for all the spinning reels, so that the activation condition for accepting the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41. Validates the stop operation of the spinning reel when the validation condition is satisfied.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 31, at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed, and the number of steps after the last reel reference position is detected in a state where acceptance of the stop operation is enabled. If the number of steps exceeds a predetermined number, the main control unit 41 determines that there is an abnormality in the rotation state of the reel, and invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels. Then, for the reel that is determined that the reel reference position is not detected and the rotation state is abnormal, the step number counter is initialized and the restart control is performed, and the reel motor is excited from the beginning of the starting pattern again. The rotation of the reel is restarted by changing the state. After that, when the reel is normally rotated, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches the predetermined number of steps after the change of the excitation state of the reel motor is started again by the starting pattern. It will be. Then, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern and the reel reference position is detected for all the spinning reels, so that the valid condition for accepting the reel stop operation is satisfied, and the main control unit 41 validates the acceptance of the stop operation of the spinning reel when the validation condition is satisfied.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32, at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed, and in a state where the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled, for example, an instantaneous blackout occurs for an extremely short time. The rotation control of the reel is stopped, the reel is caught or idle, and the reel does not rotate normally. The reel reference position is not detected, and the step counter is set to a predetermined number of steps (for example, 400 If the number of steps exceeds the step), the main control unit 41 determines that there is an abnormality in the rotation state of the reel, invalidates the acceptance of the stop operation for all reels, and the reel reference position is not detected. For, the step number counter is initialized and the restart control is performed. Then, when the reel subjected to the restart control does not rotate normally and the step number counter exceeds the predetermined step number, the step number counter is initialized again and the restart control is repeated. After that, when the reel reference position is not detected before the step number counter reaches the predetermined number of steps even though the restart control is performed three times at maximum for the reel, All reels that are rotating are stopped, and error control for controlling an error state is started to disable the progress of the game.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes a backup storage area capable of holding stored contents by being supplied with power from a backup power supply. When the power failure is detected based on the output of the power failure detection circuit 48, the control state of the main controller 41 is stored in the backup storage area. Then, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control state when the power failure is detected can be restored. Further, when at least one of the reels is controlled to rotate at a constant speed and the stop operation is enabled for the reels, if an electric power failure is detected, the control state is set to each reel. Data including a rotation state, an excitation pattern of each reel motor, and the like are stored in the backup storage area.

  When the main controller 41 recovers from the power failure by restarting the power supply to the slot machine 1, the main controller 41 detects the power failure based on the control state stored in the backup storage area. For the reel that has been in the rotating state, the excitation pattern at the time when the power failure is detected is set as the excitation pattern of the reel motor. On the other hand, the valid state or invalid state of acceptance of the stop operation for each reel returns to the invalid state regardless of the state before the power failure. After that, various controls are performed based on the control state reset at the time of restoration.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33A, the main controller 41 controls at least one of the reels to rotate at a constant speed. When power failure occurs when acceptance of stop operation is enabled, and when recovering from the power interruption, the constant speed pattern is set as the excitation pattern at the time of power failure, but acceptance of stop operation is not possible. It will return in an invalid state. Then, by starting the rotation control of the reel, the excitation state of the corresponding reel motor is changed based on the constant speed pattern which is the excitation pattern set at the time of return. Accordingly, when the reel is normally rotated, the reel reference position is detected before the step number counter reaches a predetermined step number (for example, 400 steps) for the spinning reel, and thus the reel The validating condition for accepting the stop operation is satisfied. When the validating condition for acceptance of the stop operation is satisfied for all the spinning reels, acceptance of the stop operation is validated for all the spinning reels. By operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in this state, the stop operation is effectively accepted, and the stop control of the corresponding reel is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), the rotation control of the reel is started by the constant speed pattern set at the time of recovery from the power interruption, but the torque of the reel motor is insufficient and the reel does not rotate normally. In this case, the reel reference position is not detected for the reel, and the step number counter exceeds the predetermined step number. In such a case, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the rotation state of the reel, the step number counter is initialized and restart control is performed for the reel, and the excitation pattern of the reel motor is set to the start pattern. Is set again and the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the beginning of the starting pattern to restart the rotation of the reel. After that, by performing restart control, the reel is rotated normally, the excitation pattern is switched to the constant speed pattern, and the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels. When the validation condition of is satisfied, the acceptance of the stop operation of all the spinning reels is validated. On the other hand, if the reels do not rotate normally, even if the restart control is performed up to three times in succession, but the reels do not rotate normally, all the rotating reels are stopped and an error occurs. The error control for controlling the state is started, and the progress of the game is disabled.

  Further, when a plurality of reels are rotating and the number-of-steps counter of any of the reels exceeds a predetermined number of steps, the main control unit 41 detects the reel reference position of the other reel. Without regard to whether or not the step number counter has exceeded a predetermined number of steps, the control for sequentially restarting the reels from the reel is performed. For example, even if there are abnormalities in the reel rotation status for multiple reels at different timings, it is possible to determine the rotation status abnormality first without waiting for the reel to restart, where the rotation status abnormality will be determined later. The reels will be restarted one after another.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment starts the rotation of the reels and then, when the reel reference position and the constant speed rotation are detected for all the rotating reels, when the enabling condition of the stop operation is satisfied. While making the acceptance of the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R valid for all the spinning reels, the reel reference position is detected for at least one of the reels after the rotation of the reels is started. If the number of steps after the start of rotation specified based on the step number counter or the last reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps that exceeds one round of the reel, It is determined that there is an abnormality in the rotation state of.

  In such a configuration, if an abnormality occurs even once in the rotation state of the reel, it is determined that the reel rotation is abnormal, and if it is controlled to an error state and the game progress is disabled, the reel is temporarily reeled. However, even if the rotation of the reel is delayed and the reel can be normally rotated after that, the progress of the game will be disabled, which will hinder the smooth progress of the game. There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the rotation of the reels is started, the reel reference positions are detected for all the rotating reels, and the rotation speed is changed to the constant speed rotation. When the reel rotation abnormality is determined in the established condition, the restart control for restarting the reel is performed by changing the excitation state of the reel motor again according to the starting pattern that is the excitation pattern when starting the reel. Every time it is determined that the rotation is abnormal, the progress of the game is not disabled, and the game can be smoothly progressed.

  In addition, since the acceptance of the stop operation is disabled during the period from when it is determined that the rotation is abnormal until the condition for enabling the stop operation is satisfied after the restart control is performed, the reel is not rotated normally when the reel rotation is abnormal. Can be prevented from being executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when power is interrupted and power supply is stopped in a state where the enabling condition of the stop operation is satisfied, when power supply is restarted and restored from power failure, the control state before power failure is set. Then, the control for changing the excitation state of the reel motor is restarted. However, if the normal rotation is specified by detecting the reel reference position thereafter, the acceptance of the stop operation is validated from that time. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, if the normal rotation of the spinning reel is maintained, the power supply is restarted and the game can be immediately advanced.

  In addition, when power supply is restarted after power supply is stopped with the valid condition for the stop operation being satisfied, the torque for rotating the reel is insufficient and the reel is not rotated, resulting in abnormal rotation. Even if it is determined, the restart control is performed on the reel and the progress of the game is not immediately disabled, so that the game can be smoothly progressed.

  In such a case, from the time when the power supply is restarted, the reel reference position is detected for all the rotating reels after the reel rotation is determined to be abnormal and the restart control is performed, and During the period until the activation condition is satisfied by shifting to the constant speed rotation, the acceptance of the stop operation is invalidated. Can be prevented from being executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the reel reference position is detected, and the rotation of the reel shifts to the constant speed rotation, so that it is determined that the condition for validating the stop operation is satisfied, and the reel is rotated at the constant speed. It is possible to prevent the stop control of the spinning reel from being executed by the stop operation even when the rotation has not been reached.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the restart control in which the excitation state of the reel motor is changed according to the excitation pattern at the time of starting, the reel reference position is not detected and the restart operation is not performed when the stop operation validation condition is not satisfied. When the restart control is performed a predetermined number of times (three times in this embodiment) and the valid condition for the stop operation is not satisfied, the error state is controlled and the game is disabled. If the reel does not rotate normally even by the restart control, that is, if the problem cannot be solved by the restart control, the game can be disabled.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the rotation abnormality is determined at different timings in a plurality of reels in a state where the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the restart control is sequentially performed from the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined. Therefore, even if abnormal rotations of a plurality of reels are determined at different timings, each reel can be normally rotated as early as possible.

[Display of game auxiliary display 12 during error]
When an error is detected during the progress of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment places an error code (E1 to E8, see FIG. 34) that is predetermined according to the type of the error in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When a predetermined error display condition which will be described later is satisfied (in the present embodiment, when an error is detected during the reel rotation control, it means that all reels are stopped and the reel rotation control is being performed). If an error is detected at any other time, that is, when the error is detected), the error display data including the error code set in the RAM 41c is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12.

  FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a notification mode by error notification. As shown in FIG. 34, when setting the error display data, the main control unit 41 turns on each segment of the game auxiliary display device 12 so as to display the letters and numbers of the error code, and the other segments. By setting the error display data for turning off the light in the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to display an error code capable of specifying the type of the detected error. Then, when a predetermined error cancellation condition (see FIG. 34) is satisfied, the output buffer is initialized and the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is terminated. In the error display data, the first, second, fourth, fifth, and seventh segments of the display unit 12L are turned on to display the character "E" and correspond to the number of the error code in the segment of the display unit 12R. While the segment is turned on, the other segments of the indicators 12L and 12R are turned off. Thereby, when the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the lighting mode is controlled so that the display 12L displays the letter "E" which is not displayed in the navigation notification or the payout number display. Therefore, the lighting mode at the time of notifying the error code is different from the lighting mode at the navigation notification and the lighting mode at the notification of the number of paid-out medals, and whether the error code is notified by the game auxiliary display 12. It is designed so that it is not erroneously recognized whether the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out is given.

[Control when power failure occurs while performing navigation notification]
Next, the control when the power failure occurs while the game auxiliary display 12 is informing the navigation will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary display before and after the power interruption. As shown in FIG. 35, the main control unit 41 has at least one or more as the game progresses. When the reel is controlled to rotate, and the game auxiliary display 12 is informing the navigation, when the power failure is detected, the control related to the power failure is performed to output the output of the game auxiliary display 12. The buffer is initialized to control the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display unit 12 so as not to be displayed, and the control state including the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the reel whose rotation is controlled, the number of excitation control steps, the navigation number, and the like. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the power interruption process is performed so that the contents can be restored with the contents when the power interruption was detected.

  After that, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the control state of the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power failure, the power is stored in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected. Based on the existing control state, the control state before the power failure is restored, but in the control state, the acceptance state of the stop operation by all the stop switches is changed to invalid and set. As a result, the main control unit 41 returns in a state in which the acceptance of the stop operation by all the stop switches is disabled.

  Further, the main control unit 41 stores the navigation number, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of each reel, and the number of steps in the RAM 41c when the power failure is detected when returning the control state to the state before the power failure. Restore the contents as they were. Then, when returning, the control state on the side of the main control unit 41 including the return command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure and the push order command capable of specifying the navigation number is displayed. Various identifiable commands are transmitted to the sub control unit 91. After that, the same control as that at the start of the game described above is executed, and the control for advancing the game based on the control state set in the RAM 41c is performed, so that the navigation number set in the RAM 41c is set. After setting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and controlling to restart the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the excitation pattern of the reel motor set in the RAM 41c, that is, Based on the constant speed pattern, the reel motor of the reel whose rotation was controlled before the power failure was excited from the number of steps in the excitation pattern when the power failure was detected, and the corresponding reel was rotated again at the predetermined constant speed. Control to rotate the reels, and when the reels rotate at a predetermined constant speed, accept the stop operation by the stop switch of the reels. Control is performed to enable the.

  At this time, in the control of rotating the corresponding reel again at a predetermined constant speed rotation, the rotation control of the corresponding reel motor is performed based on the constant speed pattern as the excitation pattern set at the time when the power failure is detected. In such a case, as described above (see FIGS. 33A and 33B), the corresponding reel is normally rotated depending on the state (rotating state or stopped state) of the corresponding reel. In some cases, the reels may not rotate normally, and if they do not rotate normally, restart control is performed to rotate the corresponding reels normally.

  Then, when the reels are rotated normally and not normally, and when the reels are normally rotated by the restart control, when the reels rotate at a predetermined constant speed, the corresponding reels are rotated. Enable acceptance of stop operation by the stop switch of. After that, the control waits until the stop switch whose acceptance is validated is operated, and when the stop switch is operated, the control for stopping the corresponding reel is performed.

  On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 receives the return command after returning from the power failure and then receives the push order command, so that the main control unit 91 receives the push order command based on the navigation number specified by the push order command. When it is determined that the navigation notification is to be performed on the 41st side, the navigation effect that can identify the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player based on the navigation number is restarted. After that, the effect is controlled based on various commands received according to the progress of the game. As a result, in the main control unit 41, after returning from the power interruption and transmitting the push order command and the like, the rotation control of the reel is restarted and the corresponding reel becomes the constant speed rotation, so that the stop operation by the stop switch is performed. On the other hand, the sub control unit 91 restarts the navigation effect when the push order command is received after the recovery from the power interruption. Therefore, the sub control unit 91 causes the main control unit 41 to When the stop operation is validated on the side, it is possible to be in a state where the navigation effect is already being performed.

  In this way, when the power failure is detected, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 and controls the game auxiliary display device 12 so that it is not displayed. In the period from the time when is detected to the time when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is completely stopped, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When the power failure is detected, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and when the main control unit 41 is restored, the navigation notification display is displayed on the output buffer. Since the data is controlled to be reset, the navigation number by the navigation notification is not displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for the period from the time when the power supply is restarted to the time when the main control unit 41 is restored. It is like this.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 resets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the main control unit 41 returns. When the reel is controlled to rotate at a constant speed again when the power failure is detected, the reel is stopped by the stop switch when the reel becomes constant speed rotation. Since the reception is controlled to be enabled, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, the game auxiliary display 12 starts displaying the navigation number by the navigation notification, and then is stopped by the stop switch. The acceptance of the operation is enabled, and the acceptance of the stop operation is enabled while the navigation number is already displayed.

  Further, the main control unit 41 detects the power failure during the rotation control of the reels, and thereafter, when the power is restored from the power failure, the main control unit 41 executes the same process as that at the start of the game, and is set at the time of the recovery. The progress of the game is controlled based on the control state.

  As described above, the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the main control unit 41 that controls a game and the sub control unit 91 that controls an effect. The main control unit 41 controls the main control unit 41 side. With the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode advantageous to the player can be performed.

  In such a configuration, when the power is interrupted while the navigation notification is being performed on the game auxiliary display 12, the navigation will be notified even after the power is restored, but after the power is restored, If the stop operation is validated before the navigation notification is returned, the stop operation may be performed in an operation mode different from the notified advantageous operation mode.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a configuration capable of performing the navigation notification for notifying the operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41 side. Yes, after starting the rotation control of the reels at the start of the game, while accepting the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the predetermined activation condition is satisfied In addition, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the navigation information is being sent, during the period from when the power supply is restarted until the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. , The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is not accepted, the navigation notification is restarted on the game auxiliary display 12, and after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, the stop switch is activated. Since the stop operation by the switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped in the state where the predetermined enabling condition is satisfied, the power supply is restarted and then activated. The stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R cannot be accepted until the condition is satisfied, and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped in a situation where it is unknown whether the normal rotation is performed after the power supply is restarted. It can be prevented from being done. In addition, when the power supply is restarted after the power supply is stopped while the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being given, the timing earlier than when the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the navigation notification is restarted with, the stop switches 8L, 8C are erroneously operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the player is notified of the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification. , 8R can be prevented from being operated.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, on the game auxiliary display 12 controlled by the main control unit 41, as the predetermined contents, the payout number of medals to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small winning combination, and the error that has occurred. It is possible to display an error code indicating the content, and the game auxiliary display 12 displays a navigation number that can identify an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player, as display content different from the predetermined content. Therefore, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side, a new display is made by displaying the navigation number using the display means for displaying a predetermined content. The predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed without providing any means.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in the state where the predetermined activation condition is satisfied and the state where the navigation notification is being performed. Then, when the main control unit 41 returns to the state before the power failure, after the navigation notification is restarted, the reel whose rotation is controlled when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped is rotated. The control is restarted, and after the power supply is restarted, the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 in the same display mode as when the power supply is stopped, regardless of the reel stop state. Then, since the advantageous operation mode is notified, it is possible to simplify the control related to the restart of the control for notifying the advantageous operation mode by the navigation notification.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, when starting the rotation control of the reels with the start of the game, starts the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player, and then the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. Since the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is accepted in this state, the navigation notification is started after the start of the game at a timing earlier than the predetermined activation condition is established, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to prevent accidentally operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the operation mode has been notified.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment invalidates the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R when an abnormality is detected in the rotation state of the reel after the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, and the predetermined control is performed again. When the activation condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is activated, while after the navigation notification is started, even when an abnormality is detected in the reel rotation state, Since the notification of the advantageous operation mode by the notification is continued, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without knowing that the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player has been notified. It is possible to prevent it.

  While the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can transmit a push order command capable of specifying an advantageous operation mode advantageous for the player to the sub control unit 91, the sub control unit 91 It is possible to execute the navigation effect that can specify the advantageous operation mode based on the command, and when the navigation information is given on the main control unit 41 side, by using the liquid crystal display 51 controlled by the sub control unit 91 side. Since it is possible to notify the advantageous operation mode, it is possible to enhance the effect of notifying the advantageous operation mode.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restarts the power supply to the slot machine 1 after the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped while the activation condition is satisfied and the navigation notification is being performed, and the main control is performed. When the section 41 returns to the state before the power failure, the navigation notification is restarted, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control section 91, and thereafter, the reel rotation control is started to perform a predetermined activation. When the condition is satisfied, the acceptance of the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is validated. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 is a push order command that can identify the advantageous operation mode at a timing earlier than the validation condition is satisfied. Is transmitted to the slot machine 1, and the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted. It becomes possible to start the navigation effect before the player operates, and the player mistakenly operates the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode without noticing that the advantageous operation mode has been notified. It can be prevented.

[Control when various errors are detected during navigation notification]
In the main process and the timer interrupt process (main), the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can detect the occurrence of various errors related to games, such as errors related to payout of medals, errors related to insertion of medals, and errors related to reel rotation. As described above, when a predetermined error display condition is satisfied after detecting various errors as described above, an error code indicating the content of the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12. The predetermined error display condition is when the error is detected when the reel is not rotationally controlled due to the game, and when the error is detected, the various error is detected while the reel is rotationally controlled. The case is when all reels are stopped.

  The switching timing of the display mode of the game auxiliary display when an error occurs will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 36, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 at the start of the game as described above to perform the navigation notification, and thereafter, 3 The output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12 uses the number of medals to be paid out according to the winning situation when the predetermined waiting period has elapsed since the stop switch was released after the stop operation was released, as payout number display data. Is set to display the number of paid-out medals. In such a configuration, since the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation notification is started, the stop switch on which the third stop operation is performed is released and a predetermined standby If various errors related to the game, especially errors related to inserting medals and errors related to reel rotation are detected during the limited period until the period elapses, control related to the game is continued until the above limited period elapses. When the time limit has passed, an error code indicating the content of the detected error is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12 as error display data, and the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12. After starting, control the error state.

  After that, when a cancellation condition (for example, the operation of the reset switch 23 in a predetermined procedure or the like) according to the detected abnormality type is satisfied, the control of the game is restarted from the time point before the control of the error state is started. . By restarting the control of the game, the control after the third stop operation is performed and the predetermined regular period has elapsed, that is, it is determined whether or not the winning of any of the small winning combinations has occurred, and When the winning of the winning combination has occurred, the number of medals paid out by the winning is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 as the payout number display data, and the number of medals paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. Let

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 and performs the navigation notification, and when various errors are detected, By setting the error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 when the navigation notification is ended and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the error notification is performed in the period from the start of the navigation notification to the end thereof. Are restricted from being performed.

  The conventional slot machine includes a main control unit that controls the progress of the game and a sub-control unit that controls the production. It is provided with a game auxiliary display capable of displaying an error code indicating its content, and it is possible to transmit a command capable of specifying the internal lottery result to the sub control unit, and the sub control unit, According to the internal lottery result specified based on the command, the operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the liquid crystal display or the like included in the sub-control unit to notify it.

  In such a configuration, a disadvantage may occur in the sub-control unit or the liquid crystal display device, and an advantageous operation mode cannot be specified, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control unit 41 side In addition to performing control to display an advantageous operation mode, the game auxiliary display 12 that displays the number of medals paid out to the player is used to display the advantageous operation mode. When the number of medals to be paid out and the operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 provided in the main control unit 41, the number of medals to be paid to the player on one display and the number of medals to be paid to the player are displayed. Since both of the advantageous operation modes are displayed, there is a possibility that the display content may be erroneously recognized when the display at that time is switched.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the number of medals to be paid out to the player as the predetermined content and an error code indicating the content when an error related to the game occurs, as a game assistance. A display 12 is provided, and the game auxiliary display 12 can display a navigation number that can identify the advantageous operation mode (stop order and stop timing) of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player, as display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible, and after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display unit 12, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is initialized once and then set to a non-display state. Since the predetermined content is displayed, a new display means should be provided when displaying the navigation number on the display device directly controlled by the main control unit 41 side. By displaying the navigation number using the game auxiliary display 12 that displays the number of medals paid out as the predetermined content, both the predetermined content and the navigation number can be displayed and the navigation auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation information. When the predetermined content is displayed after the number is displayed, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is initialized and hidden, and then the predetermined content is displayed. Therefore, the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of whether it is a navigation number or a predetermined content.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 and cuts the power when the game auxiliary display 12 displays the navigation number as an advantageous operation mode advantageous for the player. When is detected, by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the display content of the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden, so that the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the main It is possible to prevent an unintended display from being displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 at the time of power interruption when the operation of the control unit 41 and the like becomes unstable.

  The main controller 41 of this embodiment controls the reels to rotate at a predetermined constant speed as the game progresses, and the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, and the game auxiliary display 12 displays the game. After the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped in a state where the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the user is displayed, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, and the state before the power interruption is restored. When returning, after the navigation number is re-displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the reel whose rotation is controlled before the power failure becomes constant speed rotation, the operation of the stop switch of the corresponding reel is accepted. By controlling so as to enable it, when returning from the power interruption, the navigation number display on the game auxiliary display device 12 can be restarted before the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. It is possible to prevent the stop switch will be operated in the operation mode other than the preferred operating mode, which is suggested by bi numbers.

  When returning the control state to the state before the power failure, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the operation acceptance state of the stop switch and the excitation pattern of the reel in the state before the power failure, thereby When the control unit 41 returns, the operation acceptance of the stop switch is validated, and the rotation control of the reel is started with the excitation pattern before the power failure. In other words, the rotation control is started by the excitation pattern before the power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern for rotating the reel stopped by the power failure, but the rotation of the stopped reel is started. For this purpose, the torque is insufficient and the rotation is not started. Therefore, after starting the rotation control of the reel, a predetermined period without detecting the reference position by the reel sensor (a period longer than the time required for the reel sensor to detect the reference position when the reel rotates) When is passed, the reel rotation error is determined, the operation acceptance of the stop switch is invalidated, the excitation pattern is changed from the stopped state to the start pattern for accelerating, and the reel rotation control is started again. Therefore, the reel can be accelerated to a predetermined constant speed rotation. Further, the operation acceptance of the stop switch, which is invalidated due to the reel rotation error, can be re-enabled when the reel accelerates to a predetermined constant speed rotation.

  In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted and the main control unit 41 is restored, by resetting the navigation notification display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, the slot machine When the power supply to 1 is restarted, after the start of the display of the navigation number by the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12, the acceptance of the stop operation by the stop switch can be enabled, and the player can When the stop operation can be performed by the stop switch, the navigation number can be surely displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 to notify the navigation. Further, in such a configuration, when the main control unit 41 returns, the stop operation by the stop switch is once validated and then invalidated, and then the reel rotation control is performed again. When the reel is rotated at a constant speed, the stop operation by the stop switch is re-enabled, but when the main control unit 41 returns, the navigation notification display data is output to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12. By resetting, the navigation notification by the game auxiliary display device 12 can be continuously displayed even after the main control unit 41 is restored and until the stop operation by the top switch is validated again. , When the player can perform the stop operation with the stop switch, the navigation number is surely displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the navigation information is displayed. It can be carried out.

  In the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, the start switch 7 is operated with the specified number of bets set, and after the game is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are all operated. In a state before the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the game is finished, and the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the predetermined contents When an error that causes an error code to be displayed is detected, the display of the error code on the game auxiliary display 12 is started when the game ends. As a result, since the error code is displayed as the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12 during the period from when the error is detected during the game until the game ends, the error is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition as to whether the displayed content is the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode or the error code as the predetermined content.

[Control for setting output buffer of game auxiliary display 12 when error is detected]
Next, control regarding switching of the display mode of the game auxiliary display when an error is detected, which is performed by the main control unit 41, will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12, and as a first display content, the medal given by the winning of the small winning combination is displayed. It is possible to display the number of payouts, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number that suggests a stop operation mode that is advantageous for the player as the second display content. Further, by setting the error display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display the error code indicating the content when the error occurs as the special display content.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the main control unit 41 has payout number display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and during the period in which the payout number is displayed as the first display content. If an error is detected, then when the error display condition is satisfied as the predetermined display switching condition for switching the display content of the game auxiliary display unit 12 to the special display content, the error state is controlled and the output buffer The saving process of saving the data in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is performed, and the payout amount display data set in the output buffer is saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Then, by once initializing the output buffer to control the display contents of the game auxiliary display device 12 to non-display, by setting the error display data in the output buffer as data for displaying the special display contents, While controlling to display an error code as a special display content on the game auxiliary display 12, it controls to an error state and stands by.

  Then, the reset switch 23 is operated in a predetermined operation procedure to perform a restoration process of restoring the data saved in the RAM 41c to the output buffer when the restoration condition is satisfied by canceling the error state. , The payout number display data for displaying the payout number as the first display content is returned from the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer, thereby displaying the payout number as the first display content on the game auxiliary display 12. .

  In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the error display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 when the error display condition is satisfied after detecting the error, so that the error is detected. During the period from the time until the error display condition is satisfied, the display contents of the game auxiliary display device 12 are restricted from being changed, and the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 when the period has passed. Is able to.

  Further, when an error is detected while the game is started and at least one reel is rotationally controlled, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs a stop operation for all reels, When the game is over by stopping the reels, the error is notified, but if the error is detected when the game is started and the reels are rotationally controlled, the error is detected. It may be configured to notify the error when doing so. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 detects the error while displaying the navigation number as the navigation notification on the game auxiliary display 12. In some cases, the game auxiliary display 12 may display an error code indicating the content of the error.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the main control unit 41 has the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, and is displaying the navigation number as the second display content. If an error is detected, the error condition is satisfied and the error state is controlled, and the same saving process as when switching the first display content to the special display content is performed. The navigation notification display data set in the output buffer can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Then, the error display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12, the error code is displayed as the special display content, the system stands by in the error state, and when the return condition is satisfied, it is saved in the RAM 41c described above. The navigation notification display data of the RAM 41c is restored to the output buffer by performing the restoration process common to the case of restoring the data of the first display content to the output buffer, and before the error is detected on the game auxiliary display unit 12. A similar navigation number can be displayed.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, whether the payout number display data is set or the navigation notification display data is set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, By performing the common saving process, the payout amount display data and the navigation notification display data can be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 restores the payout amount display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Also when returning to the output buffer, by performing a common return process, the payout amount display data and the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c can be returned to the output buffer. ing.

  With the configuration in which both the number of medals paid out to the player and the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on one display as in the present embodiment, a display for displaying the number of medals paid out The process and the display process for displaying the advantageous operation mode may interfere with each other, and an unintended display may be performed on the game auxiliary display.

  On the other hand, the game auxiliary display unit 12 included in the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can display the display content based on the predetermined data by setting the predetermined data in the output buffer. With the configuration, the main control unit 41 sets payout number display data as predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, so that the payout of medals awarded by winning the small role as the first display content. It is possible to display the number of sheets, and by setting navigation notification display data in the output buffer, it is possible to display a navigation number that suggests a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player as the second display content. Yes, by setting the error display data in the output buffer, an error code indicating that error is displayed as a special display content when an error occurs. When the error display condition is satisfied as the condition for displaying the special display content while the game auxiliary display 12 displays the number of paid-out medals as the first display content, After the saving process is executed to save the payout amount display data set in the output buffer in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content is set in the output buffer. Then, the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the error condition is released and the return condition is satisfied, the return process is executed and the payout amount display data saved in the RAM 41c is output to the output buffer. It is possible to display the payout number of medals again as the first display content on the game auxiliary display 12 by returning to When the error display condition is satisfied in the state in which the navigation number suggesting a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 as the second display content, the above-described save processing is executed. By saving the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, by setting the error display data for displaying the error code as the special display content in the output buffer, the game assistance When an error code is displayed on the display unit 12 and the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the above-described return process is executed to output the navigation notification display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. By returning to the buffer, it is possible to display the navigation number as the second display content on the game auxiliary display 12 again. When the condition for switching to the display of the special display content is satisfied during the display of the first display content or the second display content, the data or the second table for setting the first display content set in the output buffer. Data for displaying the special display contents by saving the data for containing the contents, setting the special display contents in the output buffer, and displaying the saved first display contents when the return condition is satisfied, or the second data. Since the data for displaying the display content is returned to the output buffer and the first display content or the second display content is displayed again, different types of information can be displayed correctly.

  Further, by executing a common save process, the payout amount display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the navigation notification display data set in the output buffer is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to save, it is possible to reduce the capacity of save processing for saving these display contents.

  Further, the main control unit 41 executes the common save process when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied even if the display content of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is in the non-display state, The non-display data set in the output buffer may be saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. With such a structure, regardless of the display contents displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12, Since the processing when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied can be shared, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the processing performed when the switching condition for displaying the special display content is satisfied.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment restores the payout amount display data saved in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c to the output buffer by executing a common return process, and saves it in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Since it is possible to restore the navigation notification display data to the output buffer, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the restoration process for restoring these display contents.

[About connection between game control board and test equipment]
The connection between the game control board and the test device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing signals input / output between the slot machine and the test apparatus. As shown in FIG. 38, the game control board 40 is connectable to the test apparatus 1300 via the first interface board (IF1) 1100 and the second interface board (IF2) 1200, and the game of the slot machine 1 A test signal generated in association with the result is output from the game control board 40 to the test device 1300, and a test signal is input from the test device 1300 to the game control board 40. A simulation test can be automatically performed by connecting the game control board 40 and the test device 1300.

  The game control board 40 is connected to the IF1 board 1100, is connected to the first information output circuit 40a that outputs the first test signal, the input circuit 40d that inputs the test signal, and the IF2 board 1200, and is the second test. A second information output circuit 40b that outputs a signal is mounted.

  The first test signal indicates the control state and the result of the game, and a request-for-sampling ramp signal, a startable ramp signal, a BB signal, an RB game signal, a replay game signal, and reels 1 to 3 can be stopped. Ramp signal, first to third reel index signal, payout request signal, payout count signal, stop signal, 7-segment display a to g signal for setting value display, internal winning flag 1 to 8 signal, signal during signal delay, first It includes a reel motor excitation signal, a second reel motor excitation signal, and a third reel motor excitation signal. These first test signals are output under the control of the main controller 41.

  The insertion request lamp signal is a drive signal of the insertion request LED 17, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the insertion request LED 17 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not the insertion of a medal is requested.

  The startable lamp signal is a drive signal of the start valid LED 18, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the start valid LED 18 is lit, and it is possible to specify whether or not a game start operation is required. .

  The in-BB signal, the in-RB game signal, and the in-replay game signal are signals indicating that the gaming state is in the BB, in the RB, and in the replay game, respectively, and the gaming state at that time can be specified.

  The first to third reel stop enable lamp signals are drive signals for the left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, that is, signals indicating whether the left, middle, right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R are lit. It is possible to specify whether or not the stop operation of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel is possible.

  The first to third reel index signals are detection signals of the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, and can specify the passage of the reference positions of the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel.

  The payout request signal is a drive signal of the hopper motor 34b, that is, a signal indicating whether or not the hopper motor 34b is driven, and can specify that the medal payout operation is being performed.

  The payout count signal is a signal that is output each time the payout of medals associated with winning is detected, and is a signal for counting the payout of medals on the test device 1300 side.

The stop signal is a signal indicating that the stop state is controlled.
The 7-segment display a to g signals for setting value display are drive signals of the LEDs forming each segment of the setting value display 24, and the setting values displayed on the setting value display 24 can be specified. ..

  The internal winning flags 1 to 8 signals are signals indicating the winning status of the winning combination. In addition, the signal delaying signal is a signal indicating that the signal is being delayed in accordance with execution of the effect during the game.

  The first to third reel motor excitation signals are drive signals for the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, that is, the reel motors that drive the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel, and the drive status of each reel can be specified. .

  The test signal includes a closing switch signal, a reel start switch signal, first to third reel stop switch signals, a payout switch signal, a stop release switch signal, a setting key switch signal, and a setting switch signal, and the game control from the test device 1300. It is input to the board 40. These test signals are signals that function in the same manner as the detection signals of the various switches and sensors of the slot machine 1, are detected by the switch detection circuit 44 of the game control board 40, and each test signal is detected by the main controller 41. The detection of a switch or a sensor corresponding to is determined.

  The insertion switch signal is a signal corresponding to the insertion medal sensor 31, and the reel start switch signal is a signal corresponding to the start switch 7. The first to third reel stop switch signals are signals corresponding to the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, respectively. The payout switch signal is a signal corresponding to the payout sensor 34c. The stop release switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset switch 23. The setting key switch signal is a signal corresponding to the setting key switch 37. The setting switch signal is a signal corresponding to the reset / setting switch 38.

  The first information output circuit 40a is a circuit for outputting a first test signal to the IF1 board 1100, and the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a passes through the IF1 board 1100. And output to the test apparatus 1300.

  The input circuit 40d is a circuit for inputting the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the test signal input to the input circuit 40d is detected by the switch detection circuit 44. ..

  The IF1 substrate 1100 includes an input terminal to which the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is input, and an output terminal to output the input first test signal to the test apparatus 1300. ing. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler, and the information contained in the first test signal output from the first information output circuit 40a is electrically isolated from the test apparatus 1300. It is transmitted to the side. The IF1 board 1100 also includes an input terminal to which a test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is input, and an output terminal that outputs the input test signal to the input circuit 40d. The input terminal and the output terminal are connected via a photocoupler so that the information contained in the test signal output from the test apparatus 1300 is transmitted to the input circuit 40d in an electrically insulated state. It has become. The first test signal and the test signal may be transmitted while the input terminal and the output terminal are electrically insulated. For example, the input terminal and the output may be output via a photo interrupter or an isolator. It may be configured to connect to a terminal.

  The second test signal indicates an operation mode notified by the navigation notification, and includes a game start signal and a navigation notification signal. The second test signal is output under the control of the main controller 41.

  The game start signal is a signal indicating the start of the game. Further, the in-navi signal is the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 for displaying the navigation number for displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12 in the control regarding the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display device 12 described above. It is a drive signal for turning on the eighth segment of the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 based on the fact that the navigation notification is executed and the type and game of the winning notification target combination When the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the user is displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R, the ON state is set, the navigation notification is not executed, and the navigation number is not displayed on the display devices 12L and 12R. It is a signal indicating whether or not the navigation notification is being executed by sometimes turning off.

  The display signal is based on that the navigation notification display data, the payout number display data, and the error display data are set in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 in the control related to the navigation notification performed using the game auxiliary display 12 described above. Is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12 in a lighting mode that displays any of the navigation number, the number of payouts, and the error code, and is related to the navigation notification. It includes a plurality of pieces of information such as information, information on the number of medals paid out by the occurrence of winning, and information on an error code indicating the content when an error occurs.

  The navigation notification signal is a signal generated by the conversion circuit 40c included in the second information output circuit extracting only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal. It is a drive signal for lighting the first to seventh segments of the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode to be displayed, and is a signal capable of specifying the navigation number indicating the stop operation mode notified by the navigation notification.

  The second information output circuit 40b is a circuit for outputting a second test signal to the IF2 board 1200, and the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is passed through the IF2 board 1200. And output to the test apparatus 1300.

  In addition, the second information output circuit 40b, the navigation during signal and the display signal input to the game auxiliary display 12 provided on the game control board 40 is branched and input on the game control board 40. In addition, a conversion circuit 40c that converts the display signal into a navigation notification signal and outputs it by validating or invalidating the display signal based on the navigation-in-progress signal is provided. The display signal of the display unit 12 can be output to the IF2 board 1200 as a navigation notification signal.

  The IF2 board 1200 is a test device based on the input terminal to which the second test signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is input and the input second test signal (game start signal, navigation notification signal). An IF2 control unit 1203 that converts the second test signal that can be recognized on the 1300 side and an output terminal that outputs the second test signal generated by the IF2 control unit 1203 to the test apparatus 1300 are provided. ..

  The IF2 control unit 1203 includes a CPU, a RAM, a ROM, a reset circuit for resetting the CPU, and the like. The navigation notification signal output from the second information output circuit 40b is used as a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation. Signal and stop strobe signal and output. The stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal output from the IF2 control unit 1203 are output from the output terminal via the photocoupler. The IF2 control unit 1203 side and the test apparatus 1300 side Signals are transmitted while and are electrically insulated. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be electrically insulated from each other as long as the stop execution position signal, the stop reel designation signal, and the stop strobe signal are transmitted. For example, a photo interrupter or an isolator may be used. The IF2 control unit 1203 and the output terminal may be connected via the configuration.

  The stop execution position signal is a signal indicating the most recommended stop operation position according to the current game state and effect mode of the reel indicated by the stop reel designation signal described later, and the corresponding reel included in the most recommended stop operation position. The number of steps (0 to 336) of the reel motor can be specified.

  The stop reel designation signal is a signal that designates whether the reel recommended to be stopped at the stop operation position indicated by the stop execution position signal is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel. The reel to which the stop operation is applied at the stop operation position indicated by the execution position signal can be specified.

  The stop strobe signal is a signal requesting acquisition of a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal.

  Further, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 are connected via a power supply line, and power used by a device such as a photocoupler mounted on the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the game control board 40 via the power supply line. On the other hand, the game control board 40 and the IF2 board 1200 are not connected by a power supply line, but the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 are connected by a power supply line, and are supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. Part of the generated power is supplied as power used by devices such as the IF2 control unit 1203 and the photocoupler mounted on the IF2 substrate 1200 via the IF1 substrate 1100. Therefore, as the power supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 via the power supply line, the power used by the device mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the power used by the device mounted on the IF2 board 1200. , And both of them are supplied with electric power that is secured.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is provided with a connection terminal to which the wiring from the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be connected, a first information output circuit 40a, a second information output circuit 40b, and an input circuit 40d. A possible socket is provided, a wiring pattern for transmitting the first test signal output from the main control unit 41 and various drive circuits to the socket of the first information output circuit 40a, and the second test signal. A wiring pattern for transmitting to the socket of the second information output circuit 40b and a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal from the connection terminal to the switch detection circuit 44 through the input circuit 40d are formed, and the main control unit 41 is formed. And the first test signal and the second test signal output from the various drive circuits are the wiring pattern and the first information output. The test signal, which is output via the path 40a, the second information output circuit 40b and the connection terminal, and is input via the connection terminal, the input circuit 40d and the wiring pattern, is input to the switch detection circuit 44. ing.

  Further, since the connection terminal is composed of, for example, a signal pin to which a probe from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected and a connector to which a cable from the IF1 board 1100 can be connected, the connection terminal is connected to the IF1 board 1100 via the connection terminal. It is possible to easily connect the wiring of.

  The connection terminals are provided for convenience of connecting the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the connection terminals for inputting and outputting the test signal and the test signal are shipped to a game shop. It is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of cutting holes for cutting the portion provided with the connection terminals, and the cutting holes can be cut along the cutting holes. At the time of shipping to, it is possible to disconnect the portion provided with the connection terminal so that unnecessary signal input / output cannot be performed. As a result, for example, the hall device detects the internal winning flag 1 to 8 signals, specifies the winning status of the internal winning flag from the internal winning flag 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary signals from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  Further, the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are provided for convenience to output the first test signal and the second test signal to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200. The input circuit 40d is provided for the convenience of inputting a test signal from the IF1 board 1100, and is not necessary for the game control board 40 of the slot machine shipped to the game shop. is there. Therefore, the game control board 40 of the present embodiment is provided with a socket in which the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d can be mounted, and the first information output circuit 40a and the first information output circuit 40a 2 The information output circuit 40b and the input circuit 40d can be easily removed, and the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d are not required to be removed at the time of shipping to the game store. It is possible to make it impossible to input / output various signals. As a result, for example, the hall device detects the internal winning flag 1 to 8 signals, specifies the winning status of the internal winning flag from the internal winning flag 1 to 8 signals, and notifies that fact. It can be prevented from being easily used for the purpose of. Further, it is possible to prevent unnecessary signals from being easily input to the game control board 40.

  In this embodiment, such a test signal and a test signal are exchanged between the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 to automatically perform a simulation test. In the test apparatus 1300, It is possible to output the payout rate of the slot machine 1 as a result of these tests. Specifically, the ratio of the number of times the payout count signal is detected during the test period (medal payout number) to the number of output of the closing switch signal during the test period (consumed number of medals) is calculated. The result (consumed number / paid number) is output as a payout rate.

  The IF2 control unit 1203 first indicates a reel that recommends the stop reel designation signal as the first stop reel in accordance with the presence or absence of the navigation notification within a maximum of 2 seconds from the time when the main control unit 41 outputs the game start signal. After updating to the output state, the stop execution position signal is updated to the output state indicating the recommended stop operation position for the reel, and after the completion of the update of the stop reel designation signal and the stop execution position signal, a fixed time (50 ms) A stop strobe signal is output over this period, the recommended first stop reel and its recommended stop operation position are notified to the test apparatus 1300, and after the stop strobe signal is stopped, the device waits for a fixed time (50 ms). Then, in the same procedure, the test device 1300 is notified of the recommended second stop reel and its stop operation position, and the test device 1300 is notified of the third stop reel and its stop operation position. After the notification of the third stop reel and its stop operation position, the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are cleared when a fixed time (50 ms) has elapsed.

  In this way, the IF2 control unit 1203 sequentially sets the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position to the test apparatus 1300 according to the recommended operation mode. By making a notification to the user, the operation procedure recommended by the test apparatus 1300 can be specified.

  In the present embodiment, the first stop reel and its stop operation position, the second stop reel and its stop operation position, the third stop reel and its stop operation position are continuously supplied to the test apparatus 1300 within a maximum of 2 seconds. However, it is also possible to sequentially transmit these when the game starts and when the reels stop without continuously transmitting them.

  In the ROM of the IF2 control unit 1203, a recommended operation mode table in which recommended operation modes are registered in advance according to whether navigation notification is present or not is stored, and the IF2 control unit 1203 recommends according to whether navigation notification is present. The operation mode is acquired from the recommended operation procedure table, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal are output based on the acquired operation mode. Note that the recommended operation mode table may not be registered in advance, and the recommended operation mode may be acquired by using a program in which the IF2 control unit 1203 determines the recommended operation mode according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification.

  In the present embodiment, when the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is not performed, and the navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB or RB is not output, the stop in the left middle right is performed. The stop reel designation signals are output in order, and for the corresponding stop reels, a stop execution position signal indicating a stop operation position at which any of the cherries that may be missed and the watermelon configuration pattern can be drawn is output. It should be noted that such an operation mode corresponds to an operation mode in which the payout rate of medals is highest in the situation where the navigation notification is not performed.

  When the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed and the navigation numbers (10 to 13) suggesting the winning of BB and RB are output, the stop order is left middle right. The stop reel designation signal is output in order, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the symbol forming the special combination corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn in is output for the corresponding stop reel. For example, when BB1 is elected as a special character and 11 is output as the navigation number, the stop execution indicating the stop operation position where the "red 7" symbol can be drawn in for each spinning reel. When a position signal is output, and another BB2, RB, SB is elected as a special character, and the navigation numbers 10, 12, and 13 are output, "blue" is output according to the output navigation number. The stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position where the symbols “7”, “white 7”, and “BAR” can be drawn is output.

  When the navigation notification signal indicates that the navigation notification is being performed, the stop reel designation signals are output in the order of the stop order specified from the navigation notification signal, and the corresponding stop reels are arbitrarily selected. A stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position is output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the recommended operation mode is acquired according to the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and the stop execution position signal and the stop reel designation signal indicating the acquired operation mode are output to the test apparatus 1300. The reel stop switch signal can be output in the operation mode recommended on the device 1300 side depending on the presence or absence of the navigation notification, and a payout ratio close to the market payout ratio can be obtained by the test by the test device 1300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the special combination (BB, RB) is won as a result of the internal lottery, after the special notification navigation condition for the special combination determined by the main control unit 41 side is established, it is won. The test device 1300 sets a stop execution position signal and a stop reel designation signal indicating an operation mode in which a navigation number (10 to 13) suggesting a symbol forming a special role is set and the symbol corresponding to the navigation number is stopped. Is output to the slot machine on the market, after the winning of the special combination in the internal lottery, after the winning of the special combination is notified by the confirmation notification by the sub-control unit 91, the operation is performed in a stop operation mode for winning the special combination. As in the case where the special part is played and the special part is won, the navigation number will be output and the special part will be output in the game after the condition for executing the special part's navigator notification is satisfied and the final notification is made. It is possible to output a reel stop switch signal at prize is to operate embodiment, it is possible to obtain a payout rate close to the payout rate of the market by the test by the test device 1300.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the signal capable of specifying the number of steps of the reel motor corresponding to the output timing of the stop switch signal recommended as the stop execution position signal is output to the test apparatus 1300, it is arranged on the reel. Even when the number of symbols or the number of steps assigned to one symbol differs depending on the model of the slot machine, the output control of the stop switch signal for the stop execution position signal can be made common on the test apparatus 1300 side.

  In the test system including the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the test device 1300 capable of testing a game by the slot machine, the first test signal among the test signals output from the game control board 40 is , The IF1 board 1100 is output to the test apparatus, and the second test signal is output to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200.

  In such a configuration, when power lines are connected from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 to supply power to the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, respectively, the game control boards 40 and 1 are connected. The number of wires between the interface board (IF1) and the IF2 board 1200 is increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 can be connected to each other via a power supply line, and power is directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF1 board 1100. Therefore, the power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and the power supplied to the IF1 board 1100 is supplied from the IF1 board 1100 to the IF2 board 1200. The wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a first test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF1 board 1100, and the test apparatus 1300 to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. On the other hand, the second test signal can be output, and the game control board 40 can be connected to the IF1 board 1100 via a power supply line, and the game control board 40 directly supplies power to the IF1 board 1100. While it can be supplied, it is not connected to the IF2 board 1200 via a power supply line, and power is not directly supplied from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200. Since power can be supplied to the game control board 40, the wiring between the game control board 40 and the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200 can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 can output a navigation notification signal including information related to navigation notification to the IF2 board 1200 as the second test signal, and the IF2 board 1200 outputs the navigation notification signal. The IF2 control unit 1203 for generating signals (stop execution position signal, stop reel designation signal, stop strobe signal) that can be input in the test apparatus 1300 based on the IF2 control unit 1203 is a game control board. Since it is designed to be operated by the power supply supplied from 40 through the IF1 board 1100, it is not necessary to output power from the game control board 40 to the IF2 board 1200, and only the second test signal is output. Then, the IF2 control unit 1203 generates a signal that can be input in the test apparatus 1300 and outputs the signal to the test apparatus 1300. And next, it is possible to simplify the test signal output from the gaming control board 40.

  Further, in the present embodiment, photo couplers are mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, and the input terminal and the output terminal on each board are connected via the photo coupler, and output from the game control board 40. The generated first test signal and second test signal are output to the test apparatus via the photocouplers mounted on the IF1 board 1100 and the IF2 board 1200, so that the slot machine 1 and the test apparatus 1300 are electrically operated. Since it is not physically connected, it is possible to prevent the other device from being damaged due to the abnormality of one device.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is equipped with indicators 12L and 12R for displaying the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R notified by the navigation notification, and the indicators 12L and 12R are notified by the navigation notification. The display signal, which is a drive signal for lighting up, is output to the IF2 board as a navigation notification signal via the second information output circuit 40b, so that the display units 12L and 12R are displayed. Can be used as a navigation notification signal.

[About gaming machine information display 50]
In the present embodiment, the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted on the gaming control board 40 as described above, and the information necessary for determining the gambling qualities of the gaming machine is displayed. Regarding the gaming machine information display device 50, a gaming machine information display will be described with reference to FIG. 39, which is a front view of a housing showing an internal structure diagram of the slot machine, and FIG. 40 which is a diagram showing a display example of the gaming machine information display device. The installation position of the container 50 will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in a board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the gaming machine information display 50 has the game control board 40 The display content can be visually confirmed through the substrate case 120a in a state of being housed in the substrate case 120a and attached to the housing 1a.

  Therefore, the display contents of the gaming machine information display device 50 can be visually recognized through the substrate case 120a with the front door 1b opened. Further, inside the housing 1a, the visibility of the display content of the gaming machine information display device 50 is not disturbed. More specifically, at the position on the display side of the gaming machine information display 50, there are no general components such as reels provided on the slot machine 1 and other substrates, and the display side of the gaming machine information display 50 Wiring for connecting the electronic components provided in the slot machine 1 does not pass through the position. In addition, in the board case 120a that houses the game control board 40 on which the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted, a seal sticker, an entry portion for entering the opening person, management information and management history of the slot machine 1 and the game control board 40. Etc., such as a label displaying information such as a label, a sticking part to which the label is stuck, a display part on which the information is printed or engraved, a heat dissipation hole, a fan for heat dissipation, etc. It is provided avoiding the position on the display side.

  Further, the board case 120a is designed to be sealed after housing the game control board 40, and in the sealed state, the seal cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. Has become. As a method of sealing, there are a method of sealing the sealing piece with a one-way screw, a method of welding a part of the case, and a method of sticking a sealing sticker left after peeling. As a result, the connecting line connecting the gaming machine information display 50 and the gaming control board 40 is broken, and the gaming machine information display 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 enclosed in the board case 120a is correctly displayed. It is possible to prevent the contents from being displayed, and prevent a fraudulent operation such as sticking a sticker or the like on the display surface of the gaming machine information display device 50 to hinder the visibility.

  The main control unit 41, as shown in FIG. 40, the ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous intervals to the total number of cumulative games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the accessory payout ratio between the past 6000 games. , The advantageous section payout ratio among the past 6000 games, the combination payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Take control.

  The advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games is a rate of the number of games controlled to the AT-related advantageous section between the past 6000 games. The advantageous section related to the AT is a period from when the AT is won in the non-AT winning state to when the control of the AT associated with the winning AT is completed and the AT is shifted to the non-AT. The ratio of the advantageous section to the total cumulative number of games is controlled by the advantageous section related to AT with respect to the total cumulative number of games which is the cumulative number of games after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. It is a ratio of numbers. The combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the number of medals paid out during the BB controlled during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the combined payout number which is the cumulative total. The bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the payout during the BB and the RB controlled during the past 6000 games, which is the total number of medals paid out during the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the number of handouts that is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games is the payout during the advantageous section related to the AT controlled in the past 6000 games in the total payout number, which is the total number of medals paid out in the past 6000 games. It is the ratio of the advantageous section payout number which is the cumulative total of the number of medals. The combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout is a factor at the time of factory shipment in the total cumulative payout, which is the cumulative total of the number of paid out medals after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized at the time of factory shipment or for some reason. This is the ratio of the combined payout number, which is the cumulative total of the number of medals paid out in the controlled BB from the time when the data in the RAM 41c is initialized to the present. The ratio of the accessory payout to the total cumulative payout is paid out in the BB and the RB controlled from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present at the time of factory shipment in the total cumulative payout. It is the ratio of the number of handouts that is the cumulative number of medals. The advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout number is the payout period during the factory shipment of the total cumulative payout number or during the advantageous section associated with the AT controlled from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason to the present. It is the ratio of the advantageous section payout number which is the cumulative total of the number of medals.

  In this embodiment, as the bonus, only the RB and the BB in which the RB operates continuously are mounted, but winning of all kinds of small wins is allowed, but some reels are drawn. The CT may be limited and the CB in which the CT operates continuously may be mounted. When the CT is mounted, the number of medals paid out during the CT is reflected in the bonus payout ratio. , CB is mounted, the number of medals paid out during CB is reflected in the combination winning ratio.

  The main control unit 41 controls the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games in the period after the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. Fig. 40 shows the ratio of payouts of bonuses, the ratio of payouts of advantageous sections between the past 6000 games, the ratio of combined payouts to the total accumulated payouts, the ratio of accessory payouts to the total accumulated payouts, and the ratio of advantageous section payouts to the total accumulated payouts. In the display order shown in, the display is switched and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 every predetermined period (30 seconds in this embodiment).

  At this time, on the gaming machine information display 50, an abbreviation showing the currently displayed display contents in the upper two digits (for example, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games in the display order 1 is displayed, "A1") is displayed, and the data to be currently displayed is displayed in the last two digits. In this embodiment, any of the ratios and the ratios are displayed in%.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shows the advantageous section ratio, the combined-role payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous-section payout ratio, the combined-role payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous-section payout ratio in FIG. When switching and displaying every predetermined period in the display order shown, the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until these displays complete one cycle. Even if there is, the update to a new value is restricted and the display is cycled using the original value. Specifically, in the case where the game progresses and these values can be updated to new values within one period until the display is completed, the new values are calculated and the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is calculated. However, by setting the original value without setting the new value in the output buffer for displaying the display content on the gaming machine information display unit 50, the display on the gaming machine information display unit 50 is displayed. The original value may be used for one cycle, and after the display for one cycle is completed, a new value may be set in the output buffer so that the new value is displayed thereafter. In the case where these values can be updated to new values within one period until one cycle is completed, the calculation on the new value is restricted to be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. One cycle When the display of completed, performs a computation for obtaining a new value, then, it may be performed display in the gaming machine information display 50 by using the new values. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the display contents such as the advantageous section ratios calculated at different times from being mixed in the period until the display contents on the gaming machine information display 50 make one round.

  Further, when the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games or the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games exceeds the prescribed rate (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays a display mode different from normal (for example, normal mode). If it is always lit, blinking lighting, etc.) is used to display the advantageous section ratio. Further, when the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the combination payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the specified ratio (for example, 60%), the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display mode (for example, If normal is always on, the combination payout ratio is displayed by blinking, etc.). Further, when the character payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the character payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the specified ratio (for example, 70%), the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display mode (for example, If normal is always on, blinking lights etc.) are used to display the accessory payout ratio. Further, when the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount exceed the prescribed rate (for example, 80%), the main control unit 41 displays differently from the normal display mode (for example, If normal is always lit, blinking lighting, etc.) is used to display the advantageous section payout ratio.

  In this way, when the advantageous section ratio, the combination combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio exceed the stipulated ratios, they are displayed in a display mode different from the normal display, and the gambling level is high. It is now possible to warn you that it may be under control.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 has not reached the 6000 game, the main control unit 41 controls the display mode of the game machine information display device 50 in a display mode different from the normal one, for example, by blinking the display of the upper two digits. It is possible to recognize that the total has not reached 6000 games, and it is possible to recognize that the displayed proportions and ratios may be biased.

  Further, the main control unit 41 controls the ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous intervals to the total number of cumulative games, the ratio of the combined payout between the past 6000 games, the ratio of the bonus payout between the past 6000 games, and the ratio between the past 6000 games. It is determined whether or not the data used to calculate the advantageous section payout ratio, the combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, the accessory payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number, and the advantageous section payout ratio to the total cumulative payout number are normal. , When it is determined to be abnormal (when the number of bonuses paid, the number of combined payouts, the number of payouts of the advantageous section are larger than the total number of payouts, the stored value is in a certain data format (01 repeat, etc.), etc.) Is initialized with the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, and the gaming machine information display 50 indicates that an abnormality has been detected (for example, "FFFF"). By being adapted to inform the fact, the calculation of these data is made to recognize that it is not normally performed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41, during the period from the start of data collection until reaching 6000 games, that is, the ratio of advantageous intervals between the past 6000 games, the ratio of advantageous intervals to the total number of accumulated games, and the interval between the past 6000 games. Role payout ratio, character payout ratio between the past 6000 games, advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payouts, ratio of payouts to the total cumulative payouts, advantage to the total cumulative payouts During the period when the data for calculating the section payout ratio etc. is insufficient, the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is different from the display mode after the 6000 games after the collection of the data is started (for example, a constant value). It can be recognized that the data for calculating the display content is insufficient for the period. It has become way.

  As will be described later, in the process of avoiding the overflow of the total accumulated data, if the total accumulated data is initialized, it is possible to specify that fact, as described above, the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination It is preferable to notify in a different mode from the case where there is a possibility that the correct information is not displayed as the payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., in a different manner. The fact that the total cumulative data has been initialized can be recognized separately from the initialization due to an illegitimate operation for preventing the correct information from being displayed as the advantageous section ratio.

  Next, the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42 with respect to a method of totalizing and calculating data for displaying these pieces of information. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a method of totaling data displayed on the gaming machine information display. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing data extracted in the extraction processing.

  The main control unit 41 aggregates and calculates information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous zone ratio, and causes the gaming machine information display unit 50 mounted on the gaming control board 40 to display information based on the calculation result. It is possible to execute the game machine information display process as the process. The program for performing the gaming machine information display processing is included in the above-mentioned non-gaming program, and various data used by the main control unit 41 when executing the gaming machine information display processing is stored in the non-gaming data area of the ROM 41b. Remembered Further, the main control unit 41 uses the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c as a work when executing the gaming machine information display processing. The non-gaming data area used when the main control unit 41 executes the gaming machine information display processing is backed up by a backup power supply, and even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, it is backed up by the backup power supply. As long as electric power is supplied, the stored content of the non-game data area is saved. Further, the main controller 41 initializes the data stored in the game data area of the RAM 41c by the operation of changing the set value as described above, but the game machine information display process The non-game data area used when executing is not set as an initialization target even when an operation for changing the setting value is performed or when the initialization condition is satisfied for other game data areas. In particular, the data for summing, calculating and displaying the information about the slot machine 1 such as the above-mentioned advantageous section ratio is not initialized.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in a predetermined area of the non-game data area in the RAM 41c of the main controller 41, a game number counter capable of counting the number of games played in the slot machine 1 is incremented by 1 for each game, and specified. A first game number counter that is initialized each time a period (6000 games in this embodiment) has elapsed, 1 is incremented for each game, and a specific number (6000 games in a specific period) In the embodiment, a second game number counter that is initialized every time a predetermined period (400 games in this embodiment) divided in 15) elapses, and 1 is added for each game, but is initialized. There is a third game number counter that does not have any. In addition, first to fifth data counting buffers capable of counting one set of data, and first to fifth ring buffers provided with fifteen sets of buffers capable of storing 2-byte data per set are set. Has been done.

  The main control unit 41 uses the first to fifth data counting buffers and the first to fifth ring buffers to determine the total number of medals awarded in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). Number of payouts, number of payouts of bonuses, which is the number of medals awarded during the period controlled by BB or RB in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment), in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) The combination payout number, which is the number of medals given to the BB controlled period, the advantageous section controlled by the AT in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) (after winning the AT, controlled by the AT) The number of medals awarded during the period from the time when the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 until the control of the AT is finished) In the example, the number of games in the advantageous section controlled by the AT in 6000 games (the period from when the player wins the AT and is controlled by the AT until the number of remaining games in the AT becomes 0 and the AT control ends) It is possible to count the number of games in a certain game section.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 adds the number of paid-out medals to the first data counting buffer when the payout of medals is made in association with the winning of the small winning combination, and then the BB or RB is added. When the medals are paid out in accordance with the winning of a small role during the period controlled by the above, the number of the paid-out medals is added to the second data counting buffer, and during the period controlled by the BB, When the medals are paid out due to the winning of a small winning combination, the number of the paid-out medals is added to the third data counting buffer, and an advantageous section controlled by the AT (after winning the AT, it is controlled by the AT During the period from the time when the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 until the control of the AT is finished), when the medals are paid out due to the winning of the small winning combination, the number of the paid-out medals is set to the fourth value. Add to data counting buffer However, when the game is played in an advantageous section controlled by the AT (the period from when the AT is controlled, the number of remaining games of the AT becomes 0 and the control of the AT is terminated after winning the AT), Add one game to the fifth data counting buffer. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the first to fourth data counting buffers at the timing when the occurrence of the small winning combination is determined, but the first to fourth The timing at which the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer may be the timing at which a medal is actually awarded due to the occurrence of a small winning combination (addition of credit or detection of actual medal payout).

  Then, each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed based on the second game number counter, a predetermined set of buffers of the first to fifth ring buffers (previously updated set + 1th set buffer). , The first set buffer is initialized when the set updated for the first time or the previous time is the 15th set, and the first to fifth data count counter values are set to the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers. While adding to the buffer, the first to fifth data counting buffer values are added to the 3-byte total data areas A ′ to D ′ and F ′ provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c, respectively. In addition, the 3-byte total data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c are initialized, and all the first to fifth sets of the first to fifth ring buffers are initialized. The data in the set buffer is sequentially added to the corresponding total data areas a ′ to d ′ and f ′. After that, the first to fifth data buffers are initialized. Further, the total data area E'is updated to the value of the third game number counter.

  By performing these processes, the data of the buffers of the predetermined set of the first to fifth ring buffers, the aggregated data areas a ′ to d ′, f ′, and A ′ to F ′ are updated at predetermined intervals. The information will be updated.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 updates the total data areas a ′ to d ′ and A ′ to D ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that a predetermined period has elapsed, and then the main data in the total data area is updated. Of them, it is determined whether the data set in the total data area a'A 'has reached 3 bytes, and if the data does not reach 3 bytes, the data in the total data area a', A'is determined. Set in the 2-byte secondary operation data area a, A provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. On the other hand, an extraction process for extracting data of a predetermined 16 bits is performed for the data reaching 3 bytes, and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data areas a and A. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the extraction processing, the highest rank is identified by referring to the data in the total data area, and the highest rank data indicating the highest rank is determined in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. Set to area. Then, the 16-bit data below the highest order is extracted.

  In addition, regarding b ′ to d ′ in the total data area, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data areas b ′ to d ′ by 100, respectively, is a 3-byte primary operation provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. The data areas b "to d" are set respectively. After that, referring to whether or not the extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area a, if the extraction processing is not performed on the aggregated data area a, the data in the aggregated data areas b ″ to d ″ are stored in the RAM 41c as non-existent data. Set in the 2-byte secondary operation data areas b to d provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area a, the extraction processing is performed to specify the highest rank specified in the extraction processing of the aggregated data area a, and the 16-bit data below the highest rank is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary operation data areas b to d.

  In addition, regarding B ′ to D ′ in the total data area, a value obtained by multiplying the data in the total data area B ′ to D ′ by 100 is used as a primary operation of 3 bytes provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. The data areas B "to D" are set respectively. After that, referring to whether or not the extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area A, when the extraction processing is not performed on the aggregated data area A, the data of the aggregated data areas B "to D" is stored in the RAM 41c. Set in the 2-byte secondary operation data area B to D provided in the game data area. On the other hand, when the extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area A, the extraction processing is performed to specify the highest rank specified in the extraction processing of the aggregated data area A, and the 16-bit data below the highest rank is specified. Are extracted and set in the secondary operation data areas B to D.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary operation data area b by the data in the secondary operation data area a to determine the ratio of the total payout number in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment). By calculating and dividing the data in the secondary operation data area c by the data in the secondary operation data area a, the ratio of the number of bonus products in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated. By dividing the data in the next calculation data area c by the data in the secondary calculation data area a, the ratio of the number of combined winnings in a specific period (6000 games in this embodiment) is calculated, and the secondary calculation data area is calculated. The data of d is divided by the data of the secondary operation data area a to calculate the ratio of the advantageous section payout number in the specific period (6000 games in this embodiment).

  Further, by dividing the data of the secondary operation data area B by the data of the secondary operation data area A, the ratio of the total number of payouts in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data of the secondary operation data area B is calculated. By dividing by the data of the secondary operation data area A, the ratio of the cumulative number of bonus products in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data of the secondary operation data area C is calculated by the data of the secondary operation data area A. By dividing, the ratio of the total number of combined wins in the slot machine 1 is calculated, and the data in the secondary operation data area D is divided by the data in the secondary operation data area A to obtain the total in the slot machine 1. The ratio of the advantageous section payout number is calculated.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 updates the totalized data areas f ′, E ′, and F ′ to the latest information each time it is specified that the predetermined period has elapsed, and then the totalized data in the totalized data area is updated. It is determined whether or not the data set in the area E'has reached 3 bytes, and if the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data of the total data area E'is provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. The data is set in the obtained 2-byte secondary operation data area E. On the other hand, if it reaches 3 bytes, extraction processing is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area E.

  Further, for the total data area f ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the total data area f ′ by 100 is set to the 3-byte primary operation data area f ″ provided in the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. , It is determined whether the data set in the total data area f ″ has reached 3 bytes, and if the data has not reached 3 bytes, the data in the total data area f ″ is stored as non-gaming data in the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary operation data area f provided in the area, while if it reaches 3 bytes, extraction processing is performed and the extracted data is set in the corresponding secondary operation data area f. ..

  Further, referring to whether or not the extraction processing has been performed on the totalized data area f, if the extraction processing has not been performed on the totalized data area f, the number 6000 of games in a predetermined period is set to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c. It is set in the 2-byte secondary operation data area g provided in the. On the other hand, when the extraction processing is performed on the total data area f, the extraction processing is performed on 6000, which is the number of games in a predetermined period, and the highest rank specified in the extraction processing of the total data area f is specified. 16 bits of data below the highest order are extracted and set in the secondary operation data area g.

  Further, for the total data area F ′, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the total data area F ′ by 100 is set to the 3-byte primary operation data area F ″ provided in the non-game data area of the RAM 41c. If the extraction process is not performed on the aggregated data area E, the data of the aggregated data area F ″ is set to the non-gaming data area of the RAM 41c by referring to whether or not the aggregated data area E is extracted. It is set in the provided 2-byte secondary operation data area F. On the other hand, when the extraction processing is performed on the aggregated data area E, the extraction processing is performed to identify the highest rank specified in the extraction processing of the aggregated data area E, and the 16-bit data below the highest rank is specified. Is extracted and set in the secondary operation data area F.

  Then, the main control unit 41 divides the data in the secondary operation data area F by the data in the secondary operation data area E to calculate the ratio of the number of advantageous-zone games to the total number of games in the slot machine 1. Then, by dividing the data in the secondary operation data area f by the secondary operation data area g, the ratio of the number of advantageous section games in the predetermined period is calculated.

  The main control unit 41 refers to the corresponding area of the secondary calculation data area every predetermined time, and determines the ratio of the total number of paid-out sheets for a predetermined period, the ratio of the total number of paid-out sheets for the total accumulation, and the combination payout number for the predetermined period. Proportion, ratio of the number of bonus pieces paid out in a predetermined period, ratio of the number of advantageous section payouts in a predetermined period, ratio of the total cumulative combined payout number, ratio of total cumulative bonus payouts, total cumulative total of advantageous section payouts By specifying the ratio and setting it in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50, it is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  The main control unit 41 calculates the secondary operation data based on the data of the first to fifth ring buffers when the predetermined period has elapsed, that is, updates the secondary operation data every time the predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, the secondary calculation data calculated last time is maintained until the predetermined period elapses, and the total payout number and the like are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 based on the secondary calculation data. After elapse of, until the next predetermined period elapses, the total payout number and the like when the previous predetermined period elapses will be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  Note that, in addition to the above-described total payout number, etc., the number of advantageous-zone games in a predetermined period and the total number of advantageous-zone games in total are specified and set in the output buffer of the gaming machine information display 50 at predetermined time intervals. The game machine information display 50 may be configured to display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a numerical value of 3 bytes or more, a process for avoiding overflow is executed, Erase related data once.

  More specifically, when the total accumulated data reaches a predetermined prescribed number, the total accumulated data having reached the prescribed number and the data related to the total accumulated data are initialized. At this time, the data related to the total cumulative data which has reached the specified number is all the data used in the calculation (in the present embodiment, the total payout number, the bonus payout number, the combination payout number, the number of games, the advantageous section game. You may make it initialize all the total data of the number of times, or when some relatively highly relevant data (for example, total data A'of total payout number as the total accumulated data reaches a prescribed number). Is a combination data B ′ ratio of the combination payout number and a total data C ′ of the role product payout number, which is used together with the aggregate data A ′ in the calculation of the combination combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio. When the aggregated data D'of the advantageous section payout number and the aggregated data E'of the number of games as the total accumulated data have reached the specified number, they are used together with the aggregated data E'when calculating the advantageous section ratio (F / E). Advantageous section game The number of total data F ') may be initialized.

  When the total accumulated data reaches a predetermined number, the total accumulated data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total accumulated data are reduced at a predetermined ratio (for example, the total accumulated data By multiplying the current value by 0.5), the overflow of the total cumulative data may be avoided. At this time, the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data. May be reduced at a predetermined ratio, or the total accumulated data that has reached the specified number and some data relatively related to the total accumulated data may be reduced at a predetermined ratio. You can

  In addition, when the total cumulative data reaches a specified number that is set in advance, when initializing or decreasing the total cumulative data that has reached the specified number and the data related to the total cumulative data, The specified number may be the maximum value of the total accumulated data (the maximum value that can be stored in each aggregated data area (3 bytes) of the RAM 41c) or a predetermined value smaller than the maximum value of the total accumulated data ( It may be a good value within 3 bytes, for example, "16000000 (decimal number)" or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the total accumulated data consisting of 3 bytes can overflow, that is, when the data such as the total number of payments can reach a value of 3 bytes or more, it is once related as a process for avoiding overflow. Although the data is erased, the counting may be stopped without erasing the related data.

  Further, the data displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 may be executed for each game, or may be executed only for the game in which the winning is generated.

  Since the microcomputer used in the game machine cannot perform the calculation below the decimal point, the present embodiment uses the following first calculation method to perform the calculation. In the first calculation method, the numerator value is first multiplied by 100. Then, the value multiplied by 100 is divided by the value of the denominator. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculations below the decimal point. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point can be obtained. Here, when the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point is obtained, it may be multiplied by 1000.

  The following second calculation method may be used as a calculation method performed by a microcomputer that cannot perform calculation below the decimal point. In the second calculation method, first, the value of the denominator is divided by 100. Then, the value of the numerator is divided by the value divided by 100. As a result, the ratio can be calculated without performing calculations below the decimal point. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, it is possible to obtain the calculation result up to two digits after the decimal point. Here, when obtaining the calculation result of up to three digits after the decimal point, it is sufficient to divide by 1000.

  In addition, the microcomputer used in the game machine can only perform operations on values of maximum 2 bytes. Therefore, in this embodiment, the lower bits are truncated as necessary to facilitate the operation. By using such a calculation method, calculation in a microcomputer used in a game machine becomes easy, but an error occurs. However, the error is reduced as the period for calculation becomes longer, and the value approximates to the original value. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the value to be calculated is 2 bytes or less, the value is calculated as it is without cutting the lower bits, and the value to be calculated is 2 bytes. If it exceeds, the operation is performed using the value with the lower bits truncated.

  In a conventional slot machine, a player is controlled to an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  However, with such a conventional method, it is difficult to confirm whether or not the state is controlled to an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value after being installed in a game shop.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of factory shipment or from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason to the present time) in the specific period occupying in the total number of medals Since the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section), are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even after the slot machine 1 is shipped to the market, it is possible to confirm whether or not the slot machine 1 is controlled in an advantageous state based on a predetermined design value.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games controlled in the advantageous period (advantageous period) in a specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of shipment from the factory or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason) is displayed. Since the advantageous section ratio, which is a ratio, is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50, it is possible to confirm the information indicating the degree of gambling even after shipping to the market.

  In the present embodiment, it is the ratio of the number of games controlled in the advantageous section in the specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason) Although the section ratio is calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, a specific period (between 6000 games in the past, a period from the time of shipment from the factory or the time from when the data in the RAM 41c was initialized to the present) The ratio of the number of games controlled by bonuses such as BB and RB may be calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Even with such a structure, the degree of gambling even after being shipped to the market You can check the information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout in a specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason). When calculating the ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by different calculation methods depending on whether or not these original data satisfy a predetermined condition. The optimum calculation method can be selected according to the data. For example, if the total number of payouts in a specific period and the total number of payouts in an advantageous section of a specific period are within 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation is used as it is without being processed, and the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous While calculating the section payout ratio, if the total number of payouts in the specified period and the total number of payouts in the advantageous section of the specified period exceed 2 bytes, the data that is the basis of the calculation is processed into data within 2 bytes By calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated by an optimum calculation method with a small error.

  In the present embodiment, the ratio of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the first period to the total number of medals awarded in the first period (between 6000 games in the past). Is the combined combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, and the total number of medals awarded in the second period (the period from the time when the data of the RAM 41c is initialized to the present at the time of factory shipment). Of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous section) in the second period of the total combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio are calculated, respectively. Even when it is displayed on the display device 50 and the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period are calculated, the combination combination in the second period is also calculated. Even when calculating the payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the combination calculation payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio are calculated by a common calculation method. The method of calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period is different from the method of calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period. Good. For example, in the above example, when calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, the numerator is multiplied by 100 so that the result becomes%, but the denominator is multiplied by 1/100. When the result is set to be%, the total payout number in the first period can be set within 2 bytes. In such a configuration, when the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the first period are calculated, the combination source payout is used as it is without being processed. When calculating the ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, when calculating the combination combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the second period, the data that is the basis of the calculation is set to 2 By calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio after processing into data within bytes, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, is calculated in an optimal method according to the amount of data used. The advantageous section payout ratio can be calculated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout in a specific period (between 6000 games in the past, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c is initialized for some reason). The data used to calculate the ratio is stored separately from the total payout number in the specific period and the total payout number in the advantageous section in the specific period, so the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section in the specific period are stored. The payout ratio can be calculated by a simple procedure.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the period of the specific game number (6000 games), the specific game number is divided by the predetermined number (15). Number of sets (400 games), the total number of payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, the number of bonus payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, the combined number of payouts for a period of a predetermined number of games, and the advantageous section payout number for a period of a predetermined number of games, respectively. The total number of payouts for the specified number of games is calculated by adding the total number of payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of combined payouts , The number of bonus payouts, the number of bonus payouts, and the number of advantageous section payouts are calculated, and the combination payout ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the number of specific games (6000 games) Is adapted to calculate the section payout ratio, continuous combination payout ratio in the last number of a particular game, the character object payout ratio, it is possible to easily calculate the advantageous section payout ratio.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in calculating the advantageous section ratio in the period of the specific game number (6000 games), the advantageous section of the period of the predetermined game number (400 games) obtained by dividing the specific game number by the predetermined number (15) is calculated. A ring buffer composed of 15 sets of buffers for respectively storing the number of games is provided, and the number of games of the advantageous section stored in these ring buffers is summed up to calculate the number of games of the advantageous section in the period of the specific number of games. The number of games in the advantageous section in the period of the specific game number (6000 games) is calculated, and the number of games in the advantageous section in the latest specific number of games can be easily calculated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the housing 1a in a state of being housed in the board case 120a formed of a transparent resin, and the gaming machine information display 50 includes the game control board 40. The display content can be visually confirmed through the board case 120a in a state of being housed in the board case 120a and attached to the housing 1a. Further, the board case 120a is designed to be sealed after housing the game control board 40, and in the sealed state, the seal cannot be released and opened without leaving a trace. Has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine information display 50 from being improperly modified.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in order to display the game RAM area in which the data corresponding to the progress of the game is stored in the RAM 41c and the role payout ratio, the role product payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. on the gaming machine information display 50. A non-gaming RAM area in which data used for is stored is provided, and when the initialization condition of the RAM 41c is satisfied due to a transition to a setting change state or the like, the data in the gaming RAM area is initialized, while non-gaming Since the data in the RAM area is not initialized, even if the initialization condition is satisfied, it is possible to calculate and display the winning combination payout ratio, the winning combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc., taking into account the previous data. ..

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the combination winning ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous period payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the period. The game machine information display 50 is configured to be displayed, and the game machine information display 50 allows the display content to be visually recognized from the outside of the board case 120a in a state where the game control board 40 is enclosed in the board case 120a. At the same time, the board case 120a enclosed in the game control board 40 is arranged inside the housing 1a. Since the inside is configured not to hinder the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50, the display of the gaming machine information display 50 can be confirmed simply by opening the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. Therefore, based on the display of the gaming machine information display device 50, it can be easily confirmed whether or not it is controlled in an advantageous state based on the design value.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the combination winning ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous period payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly ended by changing the setting during the bonus, the advantageous section or the carryover of the bonus, the bonus being carried over is cleared, There are more than a specified number of games played while the bonus is being carried over, an operation to intentionally end the advantageous section is performed, and the game machine information display 50 is not connected. That is, it may be detected that there is a possibility that it was manipulated illegally so that correct information may not be displayed as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. Therefore, it is detected that the correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. may not be properly displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraud in which such information is not properly displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the combination winning ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous period payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the period. When the data such as the total combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio reach a value of 3 bytes or more, the data is displayed on the machine information display 50. It is used when calculating the combination combination payout ratio, accessory payout ratio, and advantageous section payout ratio by executing processing to avoid overflow and once deleting related data. Since it is possible to prevent the data such as the total number of payments that exceeds the upper limit value, even if the data such as the total number of payments used when calculating the combination payout ratio etc. exceeds the upper limit, the combination It is possible to calculate the payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio, and display these information on the gaming machine information display device 50.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). A game installed on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating a combination winning ratio, a bonus payout ratio, and an advantageous interval payout ratio, which are ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous interval) in the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 cycles information such as the combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio in the gaming machine information display 50 in a predetermined display order. (In this embodiment, every 30 seconds) are switched and displayed, and within one period until the display of these combination payout ratios and the like is completed. Even if these values can be updated to new values, updating to new values is restricted, and the display is cycled using the original values. A large amount of information such as the payout ratio can be displayed efficiently, and the information updated at the same time as multiple types of information displayed in one cycle is displayed. It is possible to prevent the information from being mixed.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given in a specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the combination winning ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous period payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the period. The main control unit 41 is configured to display on the machine information display 50, and the main control unit 41 has an advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, an advantageous section ratio with respect to the total accumulated number of games, a combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and a past 6000 games. Bonus payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games, combined payout ratio to the total cumulative payout, and total cumulative payout It is determined whether or not the data used to calculate the payout ratio and the advantageous interval payout ratio with respect to the total accumulated payout number is normal, and if at least one of these data is abnormal, it is determined to be abnormal. The data and the data related to the data are initialized, and a display (for example, "FFFF") indicating that the abnormality is detected is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50 to notify the fact. , The data necessary for calculating the advantageous zone ratio etc. has been initialized, so that the calculation of these data is not performed normally, and it is possible to recognize that the advantageous zone ratio etc. may not be a normal value. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 specifies the total number of medals given during the specific period (for the past 6000 games, at the time of factory shipment or after the data of the RAM 41c has been initialized for some reason to the present). The game mounted on the game control board 40 is calculated by calculating the combination winning ratio, the bonus payout ratio, and the advantageous period payout ratio, which are the ratios of the total number of medals awarded in the advantageous period (BB, RB, advantageous period) of the period. It is configured to be displayed on the machine information display device 50, and the main control unit 41 is stopped at the timing when it is determined that a small winning combination is generated according to the progress of the game, that is, the symbol combination reel of the small winning combination to which the medal is paid out. When the medals are actually paid out, the number of medals is added to the data counting buffer without waiting for the payout to be completed. Communicating combination payout ratio without payout associated with winning a role waits for the completion, character object payout ratio, it is possible to update the data used to calculate the preferred interval payout ratio.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to add the number of medals to the data counting buffer at the timing when it is determined that the small winning combination is generated according to the progress of the game. The timing at which the numbers are added may be a timing at which a medal is actually given due to the occurrence of a small winning a prize (addition of credits or detection of actual payout of medals). Therefore, when the medal is stopped on the symbol combination reel of the small win, the medal is actually paid out, and after the payout is completed, the combination win payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio The data used to calculate

  Although the first embodiment and the modified examples of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment and the modified examples, and changes and additions are made within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention. It goes without saying that even if there is, it is included in the present invention.

  In the first embodiment and the modified examples, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine in which the bet number is set by using the medal and the credit as the game value is explained. However, the bet number by using the game ball as the game value. It may be applied to a slot machine for setting a bet number or a slot machine of a full credit type for setting a bet number by using only credits as a gaming value. When the game balls are used as the game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls, and when the bet number is set to 3 in the first embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting the bet number using.

  Further, the present invention is not limited to the use of any one of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and for example, a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls can be used together. May be That is, it is possible to set the bet number and play the game by using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and gaming balls, and a plurality of types of games such as medals and gaming balls due to the occurrence of a prize. You may apply the slot machine which can pay out any of the value.

[Main effects]
(1) As shown in FIG. 24, the display of the navigation notification displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is maintained while the freeze is being executed. Therefore, the player can confirm the operation procedure for winning the winning combination while the freeze is being executed, and can confirm whether his or her operation procedure was correct. Also, while the freeze is being executed, the display of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is not changed, so it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood that controls other than the freeze may be executed. As a result, the interest in the game during the freeze is improved.

  (2) As shown in FIG. 24C, the start effect may be executed while the freeze is being executed. Further, while the freeze is being executed, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not changed. Therefore, the player's eyes can be focused on the start effect.

  (3) Also, the insertion of medals is not allowed while the freeze is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent medals from being inserted as much as possible during the start effect. Therefore, the player's eyes can be further focused on the start effect.

  (4) As shown in FIG. 25 (C), an end effect may be executed while the freeze is being executed. Further, while the freeze is being executed, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not changed. Therefore, the player's eyes can be focused on the end effect.

  (5) Also, the insertion of medals is not allowed while the freeze is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the medal from being inserted as much as possible during the end effect. Therefore, the player's eyes can be further focused on the end effect.

  (6) BB1, BB2, and RB are provided as special characters accompanied by the transition of the game state, and different navigation numbers are set for each. That is, it is possible to specify the type of special role based on the navigation number. The sub-control unit 91 can specify the navigation number based on the push-order command transmitted from the main control unit 41, and the special winning promotion production is performed as the production corresponding to the special winning combination that is won based on the navigation number. This can be performed using the liquid crystal display 51. Further, the navigation number can be displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12. With such a configuration, it is possible to display the information capable of specifying the type of the special winning combination, which is allowed to win the prize by the internal lottery, in association with each other on the game auxiliary display device 12 and the liquid crystal display device 51. Therefore, as compared with the case where different contents are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the liquid crystal display 51, the interest of the game is improved.

  (7) As shown in FIG. 26, when the music selection screen is displayed, the player selects and determines the music, and the determined music is output during AT. When a power failure occurs while the music selection screen is displayed, when the power failure is restored, the option selected at the time of the power failure is selected (for example, in FIG. 26D). It is conceivable to execute a predetermined return control for returning in the state shown. However, in the case of such a predetermined return control, when the power failure occurs, the music selection screen was displayed, and the options selected on the music selection screen are stored in the RAM 91c (backup process). Need to do). Therefore, the processing at the time of power failure is increased and the capacity of the RAM 91c is used to a large extent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the song A data is stored in the RAM 91c when the song selection screen is displayed (FIG. 26 (C), FIG. 27 (C)). When a power failure occurs while the music selection screen is displayed, it is not necessary to store the selected option or the like in the RAM 91c, and when the power is restored, based on the music A data stored in the RAM 91c, The song A is output and the next production, that is, the production in AT is executed, and the process returns (see FIG. 27F). That is, regardless of which song is selected on the song selection screen that was displayed when the power failure occurred, a predetermined song (song A in this embodiment) is determined. Return. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the increase in the processing when the power failure occurs and reduce the capacity used in the RAM 91c.

  (8) When the notification mode selection screen as shown in FIG. 29 is displayed, the player selects and determines the notification mode, thereby determining the notification mode of the additional lottery result effect executed during AT. To be done. In addition, when power failure occurs while the notification mode selection screen is displayed, when returning from the power failure, a predetermined recovery control is performed to restore the option selected at the time of the power failure in the selected state. It is possible to do it. However, in the case of such a predetermined return control, when the power failure occurs, the notification mode selection screen was displayed, and the options selected on the notification mode selection screen are stored in the RAM 91c ( Backup process is required). Therefore, the processing at the time of power failure is increased and the capacity of the RAM 91c is used to a large extent.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the chance notification data is stored in the RAM 91c when the notification mode selection screen is displayed (FIG. 29C). When a power failure occurs while the notification mode selection screen is displayed, it is not necessary to store the selected options or the like in the RAM 91c, and when the power failure is restored, based on the chance notification data stored in the RAM 91c. , Opportunity notification has been decided, and the next effect, that is, the effect during AT, has been executed (see FIG. 29F). In other words, a predetermined notification mode (in this embodiment, a notification of a chance) is determined regardless of which notification mode is selected on the notification mode selection screen that was displayed when the power cut occurred. Return in a closed state. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the increase in the processing when the power failure occurs and reduce the capacity used in the RAM 91c. Further, when the power is restored, instead of returning in the display state of the notification mode selection screen, it is returned in the state in which the AT production which is the state next to the display of the notification mode selection screen is being executed, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling stress.

  (9) In the following, the song selection screen and the notification mode selection screen are collectively referred to as the selection screen. When the selection screen is displayed, data regarding the predetermined options is stored in the RAM 91c. For example, when the song selection screen is displayed, the song A data used when the power is restored is stored in the RAM 91c. When the notification mode selection screen is displayed, the chance notification data used when the power is restored is stored in the RAM 91c. Therefore, when the power failure occurs, it is not necessary to store the selected option, so that it is possible to reduce the increase in the processing when the power failure occurs.

  (10) Further, when the option is determined while the selection screen is displayed, the data regarding the option stored in the RAM 91c is erased and the data regarding the determined option is stored. For example, in the music selection screen, when the music C is determined, the music A data is rewritten to the determined music C data (see FIG. 28). Further, regarding the notification mode selection screen, when the posterior notification is determined, the chance notification data is rewritten to the posterior notification data. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately execute the control according to the determined option.

  (11) Further, when the power failure occurs after the option is determined and the power is restored from the power failure, the control according to the determined option is executed based on the rewritten data. For example, as shown in FIG. 28, when a power failure occurs after the music piece C is determined, when the power is restored, the music piece C returns with the determined music piece C being output. Further, when the power failure occurs after the later notification is determined and the power is restored from the power failure, the recovery is performed in the state where the later notification is determined. Therefore, since the control according to the determined option is executed according to the player's intention, the player's determination operation and the executed process can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being dissatisfied.

  (12) In addition, all of the selection screens shown in FIGS. 26 to 29 are screens in which the player can select and decide the options. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the option according to the selection situation by the player from being stored when the power failure occurs.

  (13) Combined payout ratio, which is the ratio of the combined payout number, bonus payout number, advantageous section payout number, etc., awarded in the advantageous section such as BB and RB to the total payout number awarded in the past 6000 games. Since the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are calculated and displayed on the gaming machine information display device 50, whether or not they are advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market. Can be confirmed. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered, so it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on the design value. .

  (14) An area for storing the total number of payouts given to 400 games obtained by dividing the past 6000 games into 15 pieces, and a consecutive number given to the BB, RB, etc. during the 400 games during an advantageously controlled period. Fifteen pieces each are provided with areas for storing the number of paid-out characters, the number of paid-out goods, the number of paid-out advantageous zones, and the like. The total payout number for the past 6000 games is calculated by adding the total payout numbers stored in the ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers. In addition, the number of consecutive combination payouts, the number of bonus payouts, the number of advantageous section payouts in the past 6000 games, etc. are stored in the ring buffer having 15 sets of buffers It is calculated by adding up etc. Therefore, it is possible to easily calculate the total payout number, the combined payout number, the accessory payout number, and the advantageous section payout number for 400 games.

  (15) The RAM 91c of the sub-control unit 91 is necessary to calculate a game RAM area in which data according to the progress of the game is stored, a combination payout ratio, a bonus payout ratio, an advantageous section payout ratio, and the like. A non-gaming RAM area in which data is stored is provided. Further, in response to the setting change operation being performed, the data stored in the game RAM area is initialized, whereas the data stored in the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Therefore, even when the setting change operation is performed, the combination combination payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are calculated in consideration of the data before the setting change operation is performed, and this information is played. It can be displayed on the machine information display 50.

  (16) Since the advantageous zone ratio is calculated and the advantageous zone ratio is displayed on the gaming machine information display 50, whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on a predetermined design value even after being shipped to the market. Can be confirmed. Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the visibility of the gaming machine information display 50 is not hindered, so it is possible to easily confirm whether or not it is advantageously controlled based on the design value. .

  (17) 15 sets of ring buffers for storing BB, RB, and the number of advantageous section games, which is the number of games controlled by the advantageous section, among the 400 games obtained by dividing the past 6000 games by 15 are provided. The number of advantageous section games is calculated by adding up the number of advantageous section games stored in the ring buffer provided with 15 sets of buffers. Therefore, the number of advantageous section games in the last 400 games can be easily calculated.

  (18) The RAM 41c is provided with a game RAM area in which data according to the progress of the game is stored and a non-gaming RAM area in which data necessary for calculating the advantageous section ratio and the like is stored. Also, when the setting change operation is performed, the data stored in the game RAM area is initialized, while the data stored in the non-game RAM area is not initialized. Therefore, even when the setting change operation is performed, it is possible to calculate and inform the advantageous section ratio and the like by taking the data before that into consideration.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 39, the gaming machine information display 50 is mounted on the gaming control board 40, and the gaming control board 40 is housed in an unopenable board case 120a without leaving a trace. The contents can be confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine information display 50 from being illegally modified.

  A second embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. Note that the configuration of the slot machine of the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the above-described first embodiment, and therefore the different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 can display the number of paid-out medals on the game auxiliary display 12 when the medals are paid out due to the winning of the small winning combination, and the payout is made. When the number of medals is less than 10, a one-digit number indicating the number of medals paid out is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and the number of medals paid out is 10 or more. If it is, the first digit (one's place) number indicating the number of paid out medals is displayed on the display device 12R of the game auxiliary display device 12, and the second digit (ten's place) number is displayed. Is displayed on the display device 12L of the game auxiliary display device 12. When displaying the number of paid-out medals on the game auxiliary display device 12, the main display device of the game auxiliary display device 12 is This is a configuration using 12R. On the other hand, the main control unit 41 can display the navigation number (0 to 13) on the game auxiliary display device 12 when performing the navigation notification, and if the navigation number is less than 10, the navigation Display a 1-digit number indicating the number on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12, and if the navigation number is 10 or more, the first digit (one's digit) indicating the navigation number is the game assistance. While displaying on the display 12R of the display 12, the second digit (tens place) is displayed on the display 12L of the game auxiliary display 12, and in the game auxiliary display 12, Similarly to the case of displaying the payout number of medals, the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is mainly used when displaying the navigation number.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the slot machine 1 of the second embodiment uses mainly the first display unit among the plurality of display units 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display unit 12 to pay out medals. Is displayed, and the navigation number is displayed mainly by using the second display device among the plurality of display devices 12L and 12R.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43A, when the navigation number is less than 10 when performing the navigation notification, the main control unit 41 displays a one-digit number indicating the navigation number as a game assistance display. When the navigation number is 10 or more, it is displayed on the display 12L of the display device 12, and the first digit (one's digit) indicating the navigation number is displayed on the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12. Along with displaying the second digit (the tens digit) on the display device 12L of the game auxiliary display device 12, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12, the game auxiliary display device 12 is displayed. Of these, the display 12L is mainly used.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment wins the winning combination involving payout of medals in the internal lottery, and the symbol combination of the winning combination is on the winning line LN of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. By stopping the game, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out to the player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a navigation notification for notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player is performed. In the game auxiliary display 12 that is configured and the main control unit 41 directly controls the display, when paying out medals, the number of medals paid out to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation is displayed. At the time of making the notification, it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

  With such a configuration, both the number of medals paid out to the player and the stop operation mode advantageous to the player are displayed on the one game auxiliary display 12, so that the display content is erroneously recognized. There is a risk of being lost.

  On the other hand, the game auxiliary display 12 for the main controller 41 of the second embodiment to display the payout number of medals as the predetermined content is composed of a plurality of display devices 12L and 12R, and the main controller 41 has the predetermined content. As a display content different from that, it is possible to display a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R on the game auxiliary display device 12, so that the game auxiliary that is the display means for displaying the predetermined content is displayed. By displaying the navigation number using the display device 12, it is possible to display the predetermined content and the navigation number without providing new display means, and the main control unit 41 controls the display devices 12L and 12R. Of these, the display unit 12R is mainly used as the first display unit to display predetermined contents, and the display unit 12L is mainly used as the second display unit among the plurality of display units 12L and 12R. Since displaying the navigation numbers with, it is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is a display unit or a navigation ID, whether a predetermined content, will be misidentified.

  It should be noted that the stop operation mode advantageous for the player, which can be identified by the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by the navigation notification, is an operation mode of operating in any one of a plurality of operation orders, or a plurality of operation modes. The operation mode may be operated at any operation timing among different operation timings, or the operation mode may be a combination thereof.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the main controller 41 displays the payout number of medals as the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12, only the numbers indicating the payout number of medals constitute the game auxiliary display 12. Of the plurality of display devices 12L and 12R that are to be operated, the first display device 12R is mainly configured to display the predetermined content, that is, only the first display device is used to display the predetermined content. In addition to the first display, a display other than the first display is supplementarily used to display a predetermined content, for example, a number indicating the number of medals paid out is mainly displayed on the first display 12R. In addition to displaying, a payout symbol (for example, “=” or “”) indicating that the payout is being performed may be displayed on the second display 12L.

  In the second embodiment, when displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12, the main control unit 41 uses only the numbers indicating the navigation number to display the plurality of display devices 12L, 12L. Of the 12R, the second display 12L is mainly displayed, that is, the navigation number is displayed using only the second display. However, when displaying the navigation number, the second display 12L is displayed. In addition, a configuration in which a display number other than the second display is supplementarily used to display the navigation number, for example, when performing the navigation notification, the navigation number of the display 12L and the display 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Is displayed mainly on the display 12R different from the display 12L, and the navigation notification is executed and the navigation number indicating that the navigation number is being displayed (for example, “.” In FIG. 43 (b), As shown in FIG. 43 (c), ") Or the like may be configured to display a. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize from the content displayed on the first display 12R that the content displayed on the second display 12L corresponds to the operation mode.

  Further, in the configuration for displaying the navigation in-progress symbol on the game auxiliary display device 12 when performing the navigation notification, the navigation in-progress symbol may be a fixed display or a display that changes at every predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the main control unit 41 may be configured to change the navigation-in-progress symbol each time a stop operation is performed, or the navigation-in-progress symbol may be changed every predetermined time. The configuration may be changed. With such a configuration, the in-navi symbol can be easily recognized by changing the in-navi symbol. Further, in the configuration in which the navigation-in-progress symbol is changed each time the stop operation is performed, whether the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R being performed is the first stop operation depending on the display mode of the displayed navigation-indication symbol. It is possible to know whether the operation is the second stop operation or the third stop operation.

  The main control unit 41 of the second embodiment causes the game auxiliary display 12 to display a navigation number that can identify the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the display content different from the predetermined content. It is possible to display the number of medals to be paid out, which is information relating to the result of the game, as the predetermined content, and a navigation number for notifying an operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed during the game. On the other hand, since the predetermined content is displayed after the end of the game, the display periods do not overlap.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the main control unit 41 is a navigation number capable of identifying the operation mode of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R as the display content different from the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display device 12. The number of medals paid out, which is the predetermined content, and the navigation number, which is different from the predetermined content, are such that the periods displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 do not overlap, The display content different from the predetermined content may be content whose display periods may overlap or may not overlap, for example, the displayed periods overlap. As a configuration without such a configuration, the main control unit 41 controls to an error state when an abnormality is detected, and disables game-related control such as payout of medals in the error state. There, at the time that control to the error state as different display content from the predetermined content, the error code that can identify the type of error that has occurred may be configured to be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 a. Even in such a configuration, by displaying the error code mainly by using the second display 12L different from the first display 12R mainly used when displaying the payout number of medals, the game auxiliary display is provided. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition as to whether the display content displayed in 12 is the error code or the payout number of the dull as the predetermined content.

  In a predetermined area of the ROM 41b of the main control unit 41 of the second embodiment, lighting mode data, which is display data for causing the game auxiliary display 12 to display predetermined display contents, is preset for each display content. The mode data table is stored, and the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number by the navigation notification as the display content other than the predetermined content even when displaying the payout number of medals as the predetermined content on the game auxiliary display 12. Even in the case of using the common lighting mode data stored in the lighting mode data table, it is possible to display predetermined display contents on the respective display units 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display unit 12. It is possible to reduce the amount of display data for displaying the predetermined display content on the game auxiliary display device 12.

  Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this second embodiment, and any modification or addition within the scope of the present invention is included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. In addition, the modified example illustrated in the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

[Other modifications]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described first and second embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. Hereinafter, modified examples of the above embodiment applicable to the present invention will be described.

[About slot machines]
As the above embodiment, the slot machine that pays out the game medium to the player's hand according to the occurrence of the prize has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is paid out to the player according to the occurrence of the prize. Alternatively, an enclosed slot machine that adds game points (scores) may be adopted. The base and the drum can be distributed, and the base is common, and the base only or the base and the drum are called game machines. Further, it is a slot machine that has a game area in which a game ball can be shot and a game can be played, and the bet number can be set when the game ball passes through a predetermined area provided in the game area. May be.

  Further, in the above embodiment, a plurality of reels capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified, respectively, are provided, and after the reels are variably displayed, the variability display of the reels is stopped to derive the display result, The slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the combination of the display results of the reels has been described. That is, a plurality of variable display units capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, are provided, and after the variable display unit is variably displayed, the variable display of the variable display unit is stopped to derive a display result Then, the slot machine in which the winning can be generated according to the combination of the display results of the plurality of variable display portions has been described. However, the display result is derived by providing a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified, and variably displaying the variable display unit and then stopping the variable display of the variable display unit. The slot machine is not limited to one having three reels as long as it is a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result, and a slot machine having a plurality of reels other than three reels. Good.

[Post-judgment processing means]
In the first embodiment, the winning determination command setting process is taken as an example of the post-determination process, but the contents of the post-determination process may be changed according to the winning result. For example, when a small winning combination is won, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 is switched to the display of the number of paid-out medals after the payout processing, and when a winning winning combination is won, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed after the automatic BET processing. When the display of No. is cleared and no winning combination has been won in any of the lottery target combinations (in the case where the winning combination is lost), the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be cleared after executing the winning determination process. Further, when the special combination is won, the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be cleared after executing the game state transition processing. When the player wins the replay combination, the process of setting the replay flag may be a post-determination process, and the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be cleared after the replay flag is set.

[About the execution timing of various processes]
In the first embodiment, the payout process is performed after the winning determination process, the game end process is executed thereafter, and the automatic BET process is executed at the start of one game. However, the order of various processes is not limited to this. For example, when the execution of the freeze is determined at the start of the game, the freeze may be performed before the prize determination process is executed, and then the prize determination process may be performed. Further, the payout process may be performed during the game end process. Further, when the player wins the re-play combination, the automatic BET process may be performed during the process at the end of the game. Also, although the medal insertion and settlement operations are allowed after the payout number is displayed (S310 and S313 in FIG. 20), the medal insertion and settlement operations may be permitted after the freeze.

[About the trigger of the freeze]
In the first embodiment, the start timing of the freeze is determined to be winning the winning combination in the RT2 transition lottery during AT, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be triggered by winning or winning a special role (BB1, BB2, RB, etc.). For example, the operation mode for winning the special part may be notified to the liquid crystal display 51 and the game auxiliary display 12 in the game in which the special part is won. After that, if a special role is won in the game, freeze control may be performed to secure a time period for notifying that the bonus state will be entered. The bonus start effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 during the freeze. Further, in the bonus end game, the bonus end effect may be displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 while performing the freeze control after the third stop operation. At this time, by not switching the display of the game auxiliary display 12 during the freeze control, it is possible to focus on the bonus start effect or the bonus end effect.

  In addition, freeze control may be performed when a predetermined privilege is granted. The privilege may be a value that improves the degree of advantage for the player, and may be a value that does not directly affect the payout rate of medals, for example. Specifically, in the AT lottery, when a high-probability state that AT is won with a higher probability than usual is provided, execution of a probability suggesting effect for suggesting whether or not the current state is a high-probability state , Execution of a premiere effect along with sound on the liquid crystal display 51 (especial character appearance, execution of a special bonus effect during a bonus that occurs next time, etc.), execution of a set value suggesting effect for suggesting a set value being set, Liquid crystal display of a two-dimensional code that allows points to be exchanged for services defined at the gaming machine in which the slot machine 1 is installed by collecting a fixed number, and privilege images and privilege information can be downloaded on a predetermined website. It may be displayed on the device 51.

  Further, the number of AT games may be given as a privilege. Moreover, the privilege relating to the AT is not limited to this, and for example, the right (navistock) that allows the AT to control a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games) may be used. In addition, when the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed is determined and the AT is controlled until the navigation effect is executed by the determined number of times that the navigation effect can be executed, the number of times that the navigation effect can be executed can be used as a privilege. Good. Further, for example, when the AT is controlled until the upper limit grant amount is determined and the granted gaming value (medal payout number) reaches the determined upper limit grant amount, the upper limit grant amount may be used as a privilege. In addition, when a predetermined AT start condition is satisfied until a predetermined AT end condition is satisfied, the AT is controlled, and when the AT end condition is satisfied, if a continuous lottery for whether or not to continue the AT is performed, The continuation probability determined to continue in the lottery may be used as a privilege.

  Further, the privilege may be a right to shift to an advantageous state (advantageous state) for the player. As an advantageous state, for a slot machine, a big bonus (BB) or AT, which has a higher probability of winning a small winning combination than in a predetermined state, and a regular bonus (AT), which has a high probability of winning a predetermined winning combination ( RB), replay time (RT), concentration state of small wins, challenge range in which at least one reel draw-in range is narrower than usual and all small wins are allowed in each game ( CT) does not change the winning probability of the winning combination, but is a pseudo bonus etc. for notifying the operation procedure for winning the winning small winning combination over a predetermined period (for example, until 50 games are exhausted). Good. Further, it may be a state in which the probability of being controlled to these advantageous states has a high probability, and a state of having a high probability of being controlled to a freeze state, or a high number of games such as AT games. Advantageous states that are different from the above-described embodiment may be set, such as a state in which the game is added to the AT, a state in which the number of games to be added to the AT is easily increased, and the like. In addition, it is indirectly advantageous for the player, such as a condition that the probability of establishing a condition for obtaining a privilege on the communication network or a condition for executing a premium effect (freeze effect, premium effect, etc.) is high. It may be a privilege or a state in which the interest of the game is improved. Further, the permission determining means for determining whether or not to allow the shift to the advantageous state is not limited to the internal lottery process, and may be a means for determining regardless of the winning combination.

  In addition, the advantageous state is, for example, in the privilege granting lottery for determining whether or not to grant the privilege, the “probability of granting the privilege”, and the “probability to be granted” when the privilege is granted. At least one of "the value of the privilege (or the expected value of the privilege amount)" is higher than the normal condition (a condition different from the advantageous condition). Further, the advantageous state may be one in which the number of execution triggers for the privilege granting lottery is larger than that in the normal state. Further, the advantageous state may be a state in which the number of digestion-requiring games that need to be digested to give a privilege is smaller than in the normal state.

  For example, when the privilege is the number of AT games, the more advantageous state is “AT winning probability in AT lottery” and “AT given when AT is won in AT lottery” than in the normal state. At least one of the "value of the number of games" may be higher than the normal state. In addition, the advantageous state may be that the number of execution triggers for AT lottery is larger than that in the normal state. For example, if the AT lottery execution timing in the normal state is the first winning combination and the second winning combination, the AT lottery execution timing in the advantageous state is the first winning combination and the second winning combination. In addition to this, a third role may be elected.

[About navigation notification]
In the navigation notification of the first embodiment, a combination of segments corresponding to the navigation number is turned on so that the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is a navigation number. However, the navigation auxiliary display 12 is displayed as the navigation notification. The mode may be a display mode in which the stop order is directly shown (for example, modification 1 in FIG. 44), or the combination is not such that the stop order is directly recalled but a combination of lit segments. Therefore, it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order, and the display mode may not be easily identified without the correspondence table or the like (for example, modification 2 in FIG. 44).

  Specifically, as shown as a modified example 1 in FIG. 44, for example, the reel number of the left reel 2L is "1", the reel number of the middle reel 2C is "2", and the reel number of the right reel 2R is "3". As a result, by displaying the reel number of the first stop on one display 12L of the two game auxiliary indicators 12 and the reel number of the second stop on the other display 12R (the game auxiliary indicator 12 indicates, for example, "21" to indicate that the vehicle is in the middle, left and right stop order), and directly suggests the stop order as a navigation notification, and the symbol of blue 7 is "b7", red. By designating the symbol of 7 as "r7", the symbol of white 7 as "S7", and the symbol of BAR as "br", by displaying these "b7", "r7", "S7", and "br" on the game auxiliary display unit 12. , Blue 7, red 7, white 7, BAR by suggesting the design It is possible to directly suggest a stop timing.

  In addition, as shown as a second modification in FIG. 44, a combination of segments in which it is difficult to immediately identify the stop order in advance in the stop order (for example, as a combination of segments that suggests the left-middle-right stop order, It is difficult to immediately identify the stop order by allocating the second segment of 12L, the fourth and sixth segment combinations of the display 12R, etc., and turning on the corresponding segment, but use a correspondence table etc. The stop order can be suggested by the display mode that can be identified by the above.

  In the first embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, after switching the display, the main controller 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 and waits for a predetermined waiting period. When the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is surely controlled to be hidden when the number of paid-out medals is displayed as the predetermined content. When the payout number of medals is displayed after the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, it is preferable to prevent the display content of the navigation notification and the display content of the notification of the payout number from being erroneously recognized. It is preferable that the display of the number of payouts is performed after the display mode in which neither the navigation number nor the number of payouts is recalled. However, after displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12, the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is not cleared, and if the freeze is executed when the third stop operation is performed, the display is updated after the freeze. If the freeze is not executed, the display may be updated according to the winning determination result.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display unit 12 and then displays the number of paid-out medals as the predetermined content, the display of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is displayed during the predetermined standby period. It suffices if the mode is a period during which the player or the like can recognize that at least the light has been turned off while switching from the navigation notification to the payout number notification. For example, by waiting until the timer interrupt process (main) is performed at least once, the timer interrupt process (main) is performed and the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is switched. The game auxiliary display 12 can be temporarily turned off while the display is switched to the notification of the number of payouts. In addition, for example, when the stop switch for the third stop is operated and the stop switch is released, a timer is activated and the timer measures the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. By waiting for the waiting period, the game auxiliary display 12 may be temporarily turned off while switching from the navigation notification to the payout number notification.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment outputs the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the stop switch for the third stop is operated when the navigation auxiliary is displayed by the game auxiliary display 12. After once initializing, the payout number display data is set in the output buffer, so that the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 is temporarily turned off while switching from the navigation notification to the payout number notification. However, a display not related to the game (for example, "-" or "_") may be displayed during the switching from the navigation notification to the payout number notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display content of the navigation notification and the display content of the notification of the number of payouts from being erroneously recognized.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment displays the navigation number on the game auxiliary display unit 12 and then displays the number of medals to be paid out as the predetermined content, the display content of the game auxiliary display unit 12 is initially initialized. It is configured to display the number of paid-out medals by setting the number-of-paid-out display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 after being turned into a non-display state. That is, when the display contents of the game auxiliary display unit 12 are initialized to a non-display state and then the payout number display data is set, the data for displaying the total number of medals to be paid out in association with the winning of the small winning combination is set. By doing so, the total number of medals to be paid out is displayed over the period from the start of the payout of medals to the completion thereof. However, when displaying the number of medals to be paid out on the game auxiliary display 12, the main control unit 41 sets data for displaying 0 as initial data of the payout number display data, and then pays out medals by the payout sensor 34c. Each time, is detected, the payout number display data is updated to the total number of paid out medals, and the total number of paid out medals is sequentially displayed. The configuration may be such that control is performed so that the total number of medals paid out in accordance with the prize winning is displayed. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the first embodiment, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the predetermined content, the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 is displayed. By initializing the contents and setting payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12, whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 is a navigation number or a predetermined content, Can be prevented from being mistakenly recognized.

  Further, when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration for controlling the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated, 0 is shown as initial data of the payout number display data, and data for hiding the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is set. However, thereafter, each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data may be updated so as to be incremented by one. With such a configuration, the period from when the payout of medals is started with the winning of the small win until the payout of the first medal is detected, that is, the number of paid-out medals is 0. The game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden for a certain period of time, and after that, when the payout of the first medal is detected, the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed, and the total number of the medals that have been paid out. The numbers are sequentially displayed, that is, when the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display unit 12 and then the number of medals to be paid out is displayed as the predetermined content, the navigation number is displayed as the display content on the game auxiliary display unit 12. After the display, the number of medals to be paid out is displayed after the display is temporarily hidden, and the same effect as that of the configuration of the first embodiment is obtained, and the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is displayed. Na Or a number, or a predetermined content, can be prevented from being misidentified.

  Further, when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration for controlling the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 to be updated, when the navigation notification is finished and a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data. Data is set to hide the display on the game auxiliary display unit 12, and thereafter, the payout amount display data is controlled to be updated so as to be incremented by one each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the period from the end of the navigation notification until the predetermined waiting time elapses and the initial data of the payout number display data is set, and the payout sensor 34c detects the first medal During the period until the payout is detected and the payout number display data is updated, the display of the game auxiliary indicator 12 can be kept in the non-display state, and the same effect as that of the configuration of the first embodiment can be obtained. It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the display 12 from being erroneously recognized as the navigation number or the predetermined content.

  Further, when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. Then, in the configuration for controlling the display of the game auxiliary display device 12 to be updated, the display content of the game auxiliary display device 12 is initialized by initializing the navigation notification display data when the third stop operation is performed. Is temporarily hidden, and when a predetermined waiting period has passed since the navigation notification display data was initialized, 0 is shown as the initial data of the payout number display data and the display on the game auxiliary display 12 is hidden. Data is set, and thereafter, the payout amount display data is updated so as to be incremented by one each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. It may be configured to be. With such a configuration, the period of the state in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is finished, and the period after the navigation notification display data is initialized until a predetermined waiting time elapses. Over the period and the period from when the initial data of the payout number display data is set to when the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated, the game auxiliary display 12 The display can be set to the non-display state, the same effect as that of the configuration of the first embodiment is obtained, and it is erroneously recognized whether the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 is the navigation number or the predetermined content. It is possible to prevent it. It should be noted that these periods, that is, the period in which the navigation notification display data is initialized after the navigation notification is ended, the period from the initialization of the navigation notification display data until the predetermined waiting time elapses, the payout is performed. By applying only one of the periods from when the initial data of the number display data is set until the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of the first medal and the payout number display data is updated. After the navigation notification is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, it may be temporarily hidden and the number of medals paid out may be displayed. Any two of these periods may be displayed. It may be applied.

  When displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, after setting the initial data of the payout number display data, the payout number display data is updated every time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals. , In the configuration for controlling the display of the game auxiliary display 12 to be updated, "1" to "9" can be displayed as the display mode of the number of payouts on the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation notification is given. Part of the display mode (navi numbers "1" to "13" and ".") Is included in the display mode of the payout number, but the display mode in the navigation notification and the display mode of the payout number are When the displays on the two display devices 12L and 12R are integrated, different display modes are used, for example, in the navigation notification, the eighth segment of the display device 12R and the first display of the display devices 12L and 12R corresponding to the navigation numbers. -While the 7th segment is turned on, in the payout amount display, only the 1st to 7th segments of the indicators 12L and 12R corresponding to the payout number are turned on. It is possible to prevent erroneous recognition of the display content of the notification of.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 starts the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed at the start of the game, and then stops the third stop operation at the end of the game. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for the period until the switch is released. However, when the game starts, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated. The navigation number is continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period from one start timing until it becomes effective to one end timing after the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated at the end of the game. Any structure may be used as long as it is displayed, for example, when the start switch 7 is operated in a state where a predetermined number of bets is set at the start of the game, At the end of the game from one of the start timings when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is started, when the control for rotating the rolls 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed is started. For example, when the stop switch of the third stop operation is pressed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, when the payout of medals is started or ended in accordance with the winning, for the next game The navigator number may be continuously displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 for a period until any one of the end timings when the bet number setting operation is performed.

  In such a configuration, particularly, one start timing is a control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed when the start switch 7 is operated in a state where a bet number of a prescribed number is set. By either of the above, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12 can be started before the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective. Further, one start timing is set to either when the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed is started or when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is enabled, For example, during the period from the operation of the start switch 7 to the start of the control for rotating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R at a predetermined constant speed, a reel effect in which the reels are rotated in a manner different from a normal game, etc. Even if it is configured to be performed or controlled to a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed for a predetermined time, it is possible to start displaying the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12 after the reel effect, the freeze state, or the like is finished. It is possible to prevent the navigation number from being displayed while the reel production is being performed. Further, by setting the start timing to one when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, an event that occurs in the period until the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R becomes effective, for example, Regardless of whether or not the reel re-acceleration or the re-acceleration of the reel due to the recovery from the power interruption occurs, the display of the navigation number on the game auxiliary display device 12 is started at a predetermined timing when the game starts. be able to.

  Further, in particular, by setting the one end timing to be the time when the stop switch for the third stop operation is pressed, from the time when the stop switch for the third stop operation is pressed, all reels 2L, 2C, During the period until the 2R stops and the prize determination is performed, the display contents on the game auxiliary display device 12 can be hidden, so that when displaying the number of medals to be paid out due to winning, the navigation It is possible to prevent the number and the payout number from being mistakenly recognized.

  The display mode of the navigation number displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 and the display mode of the number of paid-out medals are as follows when the displays on the two display devices 12L and 12R of the game auxiliary display 12 are integrated. It suffices if the configuration does not include a common mode, and for example, the display mode of the navigation number may include a part of the display mode of the number of paid-out coins or a structure including the opposite relationship.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 notifies the number of medals to be paid out to a part of the display mode (navi numbers “1” to “13” and “.”) Of the game auxiliary display device 12 in the navigation notification. The display mode according to the navigation notification includes the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out (for example, “8” when paying out eight coins), although the display mode (for example, “8” when paying out eight coins) is included. There may be no configuration. With such a configuration, the display mode of the game auxiliary display device 12 is not controlled to the same mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals, and the display mode by the navigation notification and the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are performed. It is possible to prevent the display form from being erroneously recognized.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 lights up the eighth segment of the display 12L in the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 in the navigation notification, while in the display mode informing the number of medals to be paid out, By turning off the eighth segment of the game auxiliary display device 12, the display mode of one of the two display devices 12L and 12R indicates the display mode in the navigation notification or the number of medals to be paid out. Although it is a configuration capable of discriminating whether or not it is the display mode, when the display modes of at least two indicators 12L and 12R are integrated, the display mode by the navigation notification and the display mode by the notification of the number of medals to be paid out are distinguished. It may be possible. For example, when notifying the navigation number “8” in the navigation notification, by displaying “8” on the display device 12L and “-” on the display device 12R to display “-8” as an integrated display, In the notification of the number of medals to be paid out, by displaying "" (no display) on the display unit 12L and by displaying "8" on the display unit 12R, "8" is displayed as an integrated display. It is possible to prevent the mode and the display mode by the notification of the number of paid-out medals from being erroneously recognized.

[Timing at which navigation effect starts]
In the first embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 is configured to start the navigation effect when the push order command is received when performing the navigation effect, but the navigation control is started at the main control section. It suffices that the stop operation of the stop switch is enabled on the 41st side, for example, the timing of receiving a reel acceleration information command indicating that the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is started with the start of the game, The timing may be within a period after the push order command is received and before the acceleration completion command indicating that the control for accelerating the reel to a predetermined constant speed rotation is completed with the start of the game is completed. In particular, when the stop operation is validated, the navigation notification is performed on the main control unit 41 side and the navigation effect is started on the sub control unit 91 side, so that the navigation notification is performed. Even in the state, during the period from when the start operation is performed until the stop operation is activated, the notification of the notification and the navigation effect do not suggest that the winning combination of the notification target is won. It is possible to maintain the expectation for the winning role in the lottery. In addition, in particular, after the rotation of the reels related to the game is started, the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is started and the navigation effect on the sub control unit 91 side is started. The main control unit 41 controls to a freeze state in which the progress of the game is delayed in a period after the start operation is performed and before the rotation control of the reels related to the game is started, and the reel effect using the reels in the freeze state. If it is a configuration that can be performed, during the period after the start operation is performed until the reel rotation control related to the game is started, that is, during the period in which the state is frozen, the notification target is given by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. There is no suggestion of winning the role, so maintain the expectation of winning the role in the internal lottery over the relevant period. Can.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment ends the navigation notification when the stop switch of the third stop operation is released after the navigation notification is started, and issues the game end command to the sub-control unit 91. Although it is configured to transmit, the sub control unit 91 can end the navigation effect when the navigation notification on the main control unit 41 side is ended based on the reception of the game end command. The navigation effect may be configured to be performed at least when the result of the game changes depending on the stop order. For example, the stop switch is operated in a stop order other than the stop order suggested by the navigation notification and the navigation effect. When it is determined that the winning combination is not won, or when it is determined that only one winning combination is won by performing the first stop operation or the second stop operation, Prior to the navigation notification is terminated by the main controller 41 side may be configured to navigation effect is terminated. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the navigation effect from being continued even after the game result is confirmed.

[Navi notification content]
In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the navigation order of the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, which is advantageous for the player, according to the notification target combination won by the internal winning. However, the main control unit 41 uses the navigation notification to operate in any one of a plurality of different operation timings, an operation mode in any one of a plurality of operation orders, and a combination thereof. It may be configured to notify the operation mode by. Even in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 can specify that the notification target winning combination has been won, regardless of whether the main control unit 41 side controls the AT, but an operation mode that is advantageous for the player. By setting the second internal winning command so that it cannot be specified, the sub-control unit 91 side specifies the operation mode advantageous for the player according to the internal lottery result from the second internal winning command. Never.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets a plurality of different operation timings (“blue 7”, “red 7”, “white 7”, “BAR”) to the pay line LN as advantageous operation modes advantageous to the player. The operation mode of operating at any operation timing of (stop timing) and the operation mode of operating at any one of a plurality of operation orders (for example, left middle right, left middle right operation order, etc.) Although the configuration is such that the notification is provided by the notification, the operation mode or the like based on the combination thereof may be provided.

[About various commands]
The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment is configured to send a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub control unit 91, but the command form shown in the first embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. You may use. Further, in the first embodiment, the commands are composed of signals of 2 bytes, but these commands may be composed of signals of 1 byte or signals of 3 bytes or more.

  The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment is configured to send the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command, which are composed of 2 bytes, to the sub-control unit 91, and the second byte of each command. However, the form of the command shown in the first embodiment is only an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, the first internal win command and the second internal win command may be used. Are each composed of a 3-byte signal, and the third byte contains a special winning combination transmission winning number or a general winning combination transmitting number, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are 3 bytes. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the special winning combination transmission winning number is included in the second byte and the general winning combination transmission winning number is included in the third byte.

[Internal winning command setting process]
Further, in the first embodiment, the winning numbers of the special winning combination and the general winning combination are separately assigned, that is, the special winning combinations corresponding to the types of special winning combinations (BB1, BB2, RB, SB) and the special winning combinations. The winning number of the general winning combination is set, and the winning number of the general winning combination is set in the general winning combination winning number table according to the type and the deviation of the general winning combination. The winning numbers and the winning numbers of the general winning combinations are set in predetermined areas of the RAM 41c, but the winning numbers are assigned to the special winning combinations and the general winning combinations, for example, "BB1", "small winning combination", " The winning number may be assigned to each of the “BB1 + small winning combination that wins at the same time (for example, BB1 + cherry shown in FIG. 7)” as one lottery target winning combination. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special winning combination and the small winning combination are won based on only the one winning number. It is possible to perform predetermined control (setting of an internal winning flag, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) by determining whether or not.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 of the first embodiment wins the notification target winning combination when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target winning combination, regardless of whether the internal lottery result is controlled. Although the effect can be specified, the second internal winning command relating to the general combination is set so that the stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. However, when it is not controlled by the AT, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, it is possible to specify that the notification target combination is won, but it is not possible to specify the stop order advantageous to the player. As described above, while the second internal winning command relating to the general winning combination is set, when the internal lottery result is the notification target winning combination, when the AT is controlled, the type of the winning notification target winning combination is selected. A winning number corresponding to the winning number “8” when the RT1 transition replay 1 is won as the push order replay, and a second winning number “27” when the push order bell 6 is won as the push order bell. When the AT is controlled by setting the internal winning command, a second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the notified notification winning combination is sent to the sub control unit 91. It may be configured to transmit the. With such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the stop order advantageous for the player according to the type of the notification target combination can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 side can notify the player of the stop order advantageous to the player by the navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, since the winning number of the lottery target combination in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, the internal lottery target combination An effect according to the type of winning combination included in, for example, when the RT1 transition replay 1 is won, an effect that suggests the possibility that the normal replay included in the RT1 transition replay 1 will win You can

  Further, in such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the push-order command setting process and not to transmit the push-order command, and by such a configuration, the AT is controlled. In the state, the winning order included in the second internal winning command can specify the stop order advantageous to the player according to the type of the combination to be notified, and the sub-control unit 91 can determine the stop order advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify by the navigation effect, and it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41, in the internal winning command setting process, regardless of the game state, a group of notification target combinations of the same type (in the first embodiment, a push order replay group, a push order bell group). For each of them, the same transmission winning number (in the first embodiment, “2” for the push-order replay group and “22” for the pushing-order bell group) is set, and the transmission winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. However, in the internal winning command setting process, the group of notification target combinations to which the same transmission winning number is set is at least when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, regardless of whether it is controlled by the AT or not. In addition, although it is possible to specify that the notification target winning combination has been won, it is only necessary not to specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player. For example, in the case of one gaming state, the groups of the same type of notification target combination that are targeted for the lottery are divided into a plurality of groups so that each group includes one combination that is advantageous to the player. A configuration may be used in which a different winning number for transmission is set for each group. As a result, it becomes possible for the sub-control unit 91 side to specify whether the notification target combination belonging to any one of the plurality of groups has been won, and execute the effect according to the specified group.

  The winning numbers for push-order replays and the winning numbers for push-bells need only be set within consecutive numerical ranges, and the first numerical range and the pushing-bells for which the winning numbers for push-order replays are set The configuration may be such that the second numerical value range in which the winning number is set is continuous. Even with such a configuration, as in the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target winning combination by using the winning number used when performing the predetermined control. Since it can be determined whether or not it is within a predetermined numerical value range assigned to, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command.

  In Example 1, 1-28 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general winning combinations, and the winning numbers of the push-order replays as the notification target winning combinations are continuously set in the first numerical range (2-14). The winning number of the push order bell that is the notification target combination is continuously set in the numerical range of 2 (22 to 27), and the winning numbers of the non-reporting combination are before and after the first numerical range and the second numerical range. However, the winning numbers of all non-notification target winning combinations may be continuously set in the third numerical range. With such a configuration, whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, the winning number used when performing the predetermined control is within the predetermined numerical value range assigned to the notification target combination. Since it can be determined by whether or not it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command, it is determined whether the winning number assigned to the non-notification target combination is within a predetermined numerical range. The processing to be performed can be simplified.

[Regarding push-order command setting processing]
In the first embodiment, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target winning combination is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed. When it is determined that the winning combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number that can identify the stop order that is advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. It is a configuration that does. However, after the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped and the winning combination is determined, the command that can specify the stop order advantageous to the player may be a command different from the push order command. .. For example, by sending another command including the winning number of the notification target winning combination that has been won in the internal lottery, it is possible to specify the stop order advantageous to the player based on the type of the winning notification target winning combination. Alternatively, a separate command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player may be provided. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and then when the winning combination to be stopped is determined, the stop order advantageous for the player. By adopting the configuration of performing the process of setting the command that can specify the key, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and the stop operation of each reel 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed. After the winning combination to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command capable of specifying the stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. However, the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the player after the winning combination to be stopped has only to be transmitted at least once the winning combination to be stopped has been determined. Thus, the push order command setting process may not be executed after the push order command capable of specifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player is transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the push order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed in the state of performing the navigation notification. This is the configuration. However, when the navigation notification is being performed, the push order command setting process may be executed only when the internal lottery is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load associated with the transmission of the push order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

[About rotation control]
In the first embodiment, in the case where the rotation abnormality is determined in the plurality of reels at different timings while the stop operation validation condition is satisfied, the main control unit 41 sequentially restarts the reels in which the rotation abnormality is determined. However, for example, when the rotation abnormality of one of the reels is determined, the restart control is performed until a period (a period of a predetermined number of steps) during which the rotation abnormality of the remaining reel can be determined is elapsed. If the rotation abnormality is determined in a plurality of reels at different timings in a state where the stop operation enabling condition is satisfied, the restart control of the reel in which the rotation abnormality is determined earliest is delayed. It may be configured to delay until the reel restart control in which the rotation abnormality is determined. With such a configuration, different timings may be applied to a plurality of reels. In the case of abnormal rotation is determined also, it is possible to restart the plurality of reels rotation abnormality is judged at the same timing, the better is restarted when the appearance.

  In the first embodiment, the reel reference position is not detected, and if the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds a predetermined number of steps (400 steps) exceeding one round of the reel, However, the predetermined number of steps is larger than the number of steps required for the reel to make one turn, that is, the reel reference position is detected when the reel is rotating normally. It may be a value larger than the number of steps required up to.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the control for restarting the reel when the number of steps after the start of rotation or the previous reel reference position is detected exceeds the predetermined number without detecting the reel reference position. When the activation condition of the stop operation is not satisfied even after performing the predetermined number of times (three times in the first embodiment), the reel rotation abnormality is determined and the game is disabled, but the activation condition of the stop operation is satisfied. If not, if the control for restarting the reel is performed at least once, it is possible to prevent the game from being frequently disabled.

  In the first embodiment, the reel reference position is detected after the rotation is started, and the acceptance of the stop operation is validated by shifting to the constant speed rotation. However, at least the reel reference position is detected. Any configuration may be used as long as the acceptance of the stop operation is validated.

  Further, in the first embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not the constant speed rotation is started depending on whether or not the number of steps from the start of reel rotation is equal to or greater than the number of steps necessary for the constant speed rotation. However, by determining whether the constant speed is satisfied or not based on the number of steps or the time until the reel reference position is detected and the next reel reference position is detected, it is determined whether or not the constant speed rotation is started. The determination may be made.

  In the first embodiment, when the main control unit 41 starts the rotation control of the reels at the start of the game, after the navigation notification for notifying the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is started, the predetermined activation condition is satisfied. The configuration is such that the stop operation by the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted in the established state. However, it is sufficient if the configuration is such that the navigation notification is started after the start of the game and before a predetermined activation condition is established, for example, The navigation notification may be started when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, or a predetermined activation condition may be set after the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. The navigation notification may be started at any timing within the period until the condition is established. Even in such a configuration, after the game is started, the navigation notification is started at a timing earlier than when the predetermined activation condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is notified. It is possible to prevent the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R from being accidentally operated in an operation mode other than the advantageous operation mode.

  In the first embodiment, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power interruption, when the power interruption is detected. The configuration is such that the control state before the power failure is restored based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c. Particularly, regarding the reel whose rotation control was performed before the power failure, the excitation pattern of the reel motor at the time of the power failure. And the number of steps is set to return.When returning from power failure, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps, If the reel does not rotate normally after controlling to restart the rotation of the reel, reset the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel to the starting pattern and restart the rotation. Although the main control unit 41 is configured to perform the start control, the main control unit 41 is in a state in which the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted in a state in which one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power is cut off. When returning to the control state, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the corresponding reel may be set to the starting pattern.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of a start pattern, a constant speed pattern, and a stop pattern when performing a normal game control. As shown in (a), the starting pattern is selected on condition that the effective start switch 7 is operated, and the reel in the stopped state is started to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, while standing by in this state, the stop pattern is selected according to the number of sliding frames for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and the stop switch is operated. Then, the reel is stopped at the stop position corresponding to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in the first embodiment). After that, the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started, and keeps the reel in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. The rotation of the reel is controlled by, and when the reel is stopped in the middle of the start due to the power interruption, when returning from the power interruption, the starting pattern selected at the time of the power interruption is used. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel can be started without temporarily making the reel not normally rotate.

  In the first embodiment, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is restarted, when the control state in the main control unit 41 is returned to the control state before the power interruption, when the power interruption is detected. The configuration is such that the control state before the power failure is restored based on the control state stored in the RAM 41c. Particularly, regarding the reel whose rotation control was performed before the power failure, the excitation pattern of the reel motor at the time of the power failure. And the number of steps is set to return.When returning from power failure, the excitation state of the reel motor is changed from the excitation pattern at the time of power failure, that is, the constant speed pattern and the number of steps, If the reel does not rotate normally after controlling to restart the rotation of the reel, reset the excitation pattern of the corresponding reel to the starting pattern and restart the rotation. Although the main control unit 41 is configured to perform the start control, the main control unit 41 is in a state in which the power supply is stopped and the power supply is restarted in a state in which one of the reels is rotationally controlled before the power is cut off. When returning to the control state, the excitation pattern of the reel motor of the corresponding reel may be set to the starting pattern.

  Specifically, the main control unit 41 selects the excitation pattern of the reel motor in the order of a start pattern, a constant speed pattern, and a stop pattern when performing a normal game control. As shown in (a), the starting pattern is selected on condition that the effective start switch 7 is operated, and the reel in the stopped state is started to accelerate to a predetermined constant speed rotation. After that, a constant speed pattern is selected and the reel is rotated at a predetermined constant speed. Then, while standing by in this state, the stop pattern is selected according to the number of sliding frames for the reel corresponding to the stop switch operated on condition that the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, and the stop switch is operated. Then, the reel is stopped at the stop position corresponding to the operation of the stop switch within the maximum stop delay time (190 ms in the first embodiment). After that, the main control unit 41 does not select the excitation pattern until the next game is started, and keeps the reel in a stopped state, as shown in FIG. The rotation of the reel is controlled by, and when the reel is stopped in the middle of the start due to the power interruption, when returning from the power interruption, the starting pattern selected at the time of the power interruption is used. By changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel can be started without temporarily making the reel not normally rotate.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), the rotation of the reel is controlled by a constant speed pattern before the power is cut off. When returning, by changing the excitation pattern from the constant speed pattern selected at the time of power interruption to the starting pattern and changing the excitation state from the first step of the starting pattern, the reel is not normally rotated The reel can be started without.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (d), the reel is controlled to be stopped from rotating by a stop pattern before the power is cut off. When recovering from the power failure, by using the stop pattern selected at the time of power failure and changing the excitation state from the number of steps at the time of power failure in the stop pattern, the stop pattern being executed at the time of power failure can be changed. By continuously executing, the stop pattern that was being executed at the time of power interruption can be executed to the end within a specific time (190 ms in the first embodiment) excluding the time during power interruption after starting before the power interruption. You can

[Control when an error is detected during navigation notification]
In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 initializes the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the power failure is detected while the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the game auxiliary is displayed. The configuration is such that the display mode of the display 12 is controlled to be non-display. However, it suffices if the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled to be hidden when the power failure is detected. For example, based on the data set in the output buffer, by clearing the output port that outputs a control signal to the LED drive circuit 47 that controls the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 By controlling the output of the drive signal output from the LED drive circuit 47 for controlling the display mode of the game auxiliary display 12 to the game auxiliary display 12, the game auxiliary display 12 is controlled. May be configured so as to be hidden. Even in such a configuration, similarly to the configuration of the first embodiment, it is possible to prevent unintended display on the game auxiliary display 12 when the power is cut off.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the error code as the predetermined content other than the navigation number while the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12. When is satisfied, the game auxiliary display 12 does not display the predetermined content until the game ends. However, it is sufficient if the display contents other than the navigation number are not displayed in the state where the navigation number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the display contents other than the error code may be applied as the predetermined contents. It is possible to prevent the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 from being a navigation number or a predetermined content from being erroneously recognized.

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 displays the total number of medals (8 in the first embodiment) to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the small winning combination as the payout number display data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12. By setting the data to be displayed, if an error is detected during the period in which the total number of medals to be paid out is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 as the first display content, then the error display condition is satisfied. At this time, the display content of the game auxiliary display device 12 is switched to display the error code indicating the content of the error detected as the special display content (see FIG. 34). However, when displaying the payout number of medals on the game auxiliary display 12, the main control section 41 sets initial data of the payout number display data, and then each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, The payout number display data may be updated, and the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be updated. In such a configuration, each time the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals, the payout number display data is updated, and while the control for paying out a predetermined number of medals is performed while the small winning combination is won, For example, when the payout error (E1) is detected due to a shortage of medals in the hopper unit 34 and the error display condition is satisfied, the number of medals finally detected by the payout sensor 34c (for example, 4 The payout number display data for displaying the first sheet etc.) is saved in the save area. After that, by initializing the output buffer, the display contents of the game auxiliary display device 12 are controlled so as not to be displayed, the error display data indicating the payout error is set in the output buffer, and the error code is displayed. When the return condition is satisfied, the payout amount display data for displaying the number of medals (for example, the fourth coin) finally detected by the payout sensor 34c is displayed as the payout amount display data, as a game auxiliary display. By returning to the output buffer of 12, it is possible to return the display of the payout number on the game auxiliary display 12 to the display content when the error is detected.

  The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment stops the power supply to the slot machine 1 while displaying the navigation number indicating the advantageous operation mode advantageous to the player on the game auxiliary display 12, When the power failure is detected, the output contents of the game auxiliary display unit 12 are initialized by initializing the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12. However, regardless of the display content displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 may be initialized when the power failure is detected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent unintended display on the game auxiliary display 12 when the power is cut off, regardless of the display state on the game auxiliary display 12.

  The main control unit 41 of the first embodiment can display predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display device 12 by setting predetermined data in the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12. When switching, the data set in the output buffer is saved in the RAM 41c and new data is set, so that the display content of the game auxiliary display device 12 can be switched to the display content based on the new data. However, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are switchably provided, and when the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, the first output is set. While the display contents based on the data set in the buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, the second output buffer is provided as an output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12. When the FA is set, the display contents based on the data set in the second output buffer are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and the output buffer is set to the first output buffer and the second output buffer. The display contents of the game auxiliary display device 12 may be switched by switching with and.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, in the configuration in which the first output buffer and the second output buffer are provided as the output buffers of the game auxiliary display unit 12, the main control unit 41 causes the game auxiliary display. When an error is detected when the payout number is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 by setting the payout number display data in the first output buffer which is set as the output buffer of the display device 12, it occurs. While the error display data including the error code indicating the content of the error being set is set in the second output buffer, the payout amount display data set in the first output buffer is held as it is. Then, when the error display condition is satisfied, the error state is controlled, and the output buffer of the game auxiliary display device 12 is switched from the first output buffer to the second output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display device 12 has a second output buffer. While controlling to display the error code based on the error display data set in the output buffer of No. 2, the error state is controlled to stand by.

  Then, when the reset switch 23 is operated in a predetermined operation procedure so that the error condition is released and the return condition is satisfied, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. By switching to the output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 displays the payout amount based on the payout amount display data held in the first output buffer. Also, when switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 when the return condition is satisfied, the second output buffer is initialized based on the cancellation of the error state.

  Although not shown, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is used as a first output buffer, and navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer to display the navigation number on the game auxiliary display 12. When an error is detected and an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred is displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12, when the error is detected, the error display data is displayed in the second output buffer. Then, when the error display condition is satisfied, by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 to the second output buffer, the error code can be displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and then , When the return condition is satisfied, by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12 to the first output buffer, the display contents of the game auxiliary display unit 12 can be changed. It is possible to return to a fine number.

  With such a configuration, similar to the configuration of the first embodiment, as the first display content, the payout number of medals awarded by the winning of the small winning combination, and as the second display content, the stop operation advantageous for the player. It is possible to display a navigation number suggesting a mode and an error code indicating the content as a special display content when an error occurs on the common game auxiliary display unit 12.

  Further, when detecting an error, the main control unit 41 sets error display data including an error code indicating the content of the error that has occurred in the second output buffer, the error state is canceled, and the return condition is satisfied. When this happens, the second output buffer is initialized and the error display data is erased. Since the error display data is held in the buffer, the data set in the second output buffer can be used to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, the determination of the error occurrence status. There is.

  Further, since the main control unit 41 sets the error display data in the second output buffer when an error is detected, the main control unit 41 holds the data set in the first output buffer as it is. By using the data set in the output buffer, it is possible to perform a predetermined determination process, for example, the determination of the control status such as whether the navigation is informing or paying.

  Further, the main control unit 41 switches the output buffer of the game auxiliary display unit 12 to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied after setting the error display data in the second output buffer. After switching the buffer to the second output buffer, the game auxiliary display 12 can display the display content based on the data set in the second output buffer without delay.

  Even in such a configuration, when the payout number of medals is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, after the initial data of the payout number display data is set, the payout sensor 34c detects the payout of medals every time. Alternatively, the payout number display data may be updated and the display of the game auxiliary display 12 may be controlled to be updated. Even in such a configuration, an error occurs while the payout number display data is being updated. However, when the error display condition is satisfied, during the period in which the error code is displayed on the game auxiliary display 12 based on the second output buffer, the payout number display data which is being updated is the first output. Since it is held in the buffer, when the return condition is satisfied, by displaying the game auxiliary display 12 based on the first output buffer, The display of the payout number of the auxiliary display 12, can be returned to the display contents when an error is detected.

  In this way, the main control unit 41 sets the game auxiliary display 12 and the first output buffer and the second output buffer as output buffers for setting the data for displaying the predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12. In the configuration including the output buffer, the main control unit 41 displays a navigation number indicating an advantageous operation mode that is advantageous to the player as the normal display content and an error code indicating the content of the error that is occurring as the special display content, as a game auxiliary display. It is a configuration that can be displayed on 12, the first output buffer is set as the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12, and the navigation notification display data is set in the first output buffer, so that the normal display contents It is possible to display the navigation number as, and switch to display the special display content while the normal display content is being displayed. Based on the data set in the second output buffer by switching the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 from the first output buffer to the second output buffer when the error display condition is satisfied as a condition. , Special display contents are displayed on the game auxiliary display 12, and when the return condition is satisfied by canceling the error state, the output buffer of the game auxiliary display 12 is changed from the second output buffer to the first output buffer. By switching to, the navigation auxiliary number is displayed again on the game auxiliary indicator 12 as the first display content, and different types of information are displayed on the game auxiliary indicator 12 as in the case of the first embodiment. Each can be displayed correctly.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12. In the configuration including the above, the main control unit 41 has the content of the error that occurs before the error display condition is satisfied as the switching condition for displaying the error code as the special display content and after the error is detected. The error display data for displaying the error code as special display content can be output as a second output without being aware of the timing when the error display condition is satisfied by configuring the error display data including the error code indicating The timing of setting in the buffer can be designed relatively freely.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12. In the configuration including the first configuration, it is possible to refer to the data set in the first output buffer or the second output buffer in a predetermined determination process (for example, error determination). Since the predetermined determination process can be performed using the data set in the output buffer or the second output buffer (for example, in the case of error determination, the data set in the second output buffer), the predetermined determination is performed. It is not necessary to have the data used for processing separately from the data of the display contents.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12. In the configuration including, the normal display contents are the number of medals to be paid out to the player in accordance with the winning (first display contents), and the advantageous operation which is advantageous for the player, in which the display period does not overlap with the first display contents. Including the navigation number (second display content) indicating the mode, the main control unit 41 sets both the first display content and the second display content in the first output buffer, so that the game auxiliary display unit 12 displays. By configuring to display the number of paid-out medals and the navigation number, both different display contents that do not overlap the display period can be set in the first output buffer, thereby improving the game. Can be displayed on the display 12, it is not necessary to provide an extra output buffer.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is a first output buffer and a second output buffer as output buffers for setting the game auxiliary display 12 and data for displaying predetermined display contents on the game auxiliary display 12. In the configuration including, regardless of which display is being performed on the game auxiliary display 12, when the power interruption is detected, the first output buffer and the second output buffer are set. By adopting a configuration in which the existing data is initialized, it is possible to prevent an unintended display from being displayed on the game auxiliary display device 12 when the power is cut off.

[About connection between game control board and test equipment]
The slot machines provided by the third party institution for testing are usually about several units. In addition, the mass production slot machines shipped to the amusement store input / output these test signals and test signals. Since it is not necessary to perform it, these slot machines for mass production may be equipped with the game control board 40 which has the wiring pattern but is not provided with the above-mentioned connection terminals. The manufacturing cost of the slot machine can be reduced. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200 and the test apparatus 1300 can be mounted only by mounting the connection terminals. It is possible to connect easily. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal and a connection terminal for connection with the IF1 board 1100, the IF2 board 1200 and the test apparatus 1300. Alternatively, the wiring pattern and the connection terminal may not be provided. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. This can further reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production.

  Further, in the mass-production slot machine, the game control board 40, which has the wiring pattern formed but does not have the sockets for the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d, is mounted. However, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production. Further, in this case, since the wiring pattern for transmitting the test signal and the test signal is formed on the game control board 40, the socket is mounted and the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b are mounted. The IF1 board, the IF2 board, and the test apparatus 1300 can be easily connected only by mounting the input circuit 40d. Further, only the test slot machine is provided with a wiring pattern for transmitting a test signal and a test signal, and sockets for mounting the first information output circuit 40a, the second information output circuit 40b, and the input circuit 40d, which are used for mass production. The slot machine may be configured without such wiring patterns and sockets. That is, the main control unit 41 controls the output of the test signal, but the test signal may not be actually output. This can further reduce the manufacturing cost of the slot machine for mass production.

  The game control board 40 may generate a second test signal that can be input by the test apparatus 1300 and output the second test signal to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200.

  Further, the IF1 board 1100 only relays the first test signal output from the game control board 40, but the IF1 board 1100 is also equipped with a control unit including a CPU, etc. A configuration may be adopted in which the output first test signal is changed to a mode in which the test device 1300 can be input, and with such a configuration, the test signal output from the game control board 40 can be simplified. You can

  In the first embodiment, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification when controlling the AT, and the game control board 40 outputs the first test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100. The configuration is provided with the first information output circuit 40a and the second information output circuit 40b that outputs the second test signal to the IF2 board 1200, the navigation notification signal including the information related to the navigation notification. 41 may not perform the navigation notification and the game control board 40 may not output the navigation notification signal to the IF2 board 1200. In such a configuration, the first information output circuit 40a of the first embodiment is common. By providing a test signal indicating the result of the game to the IF1 board 1100 by using the circuit of, a means for executing the navigation notification and a means for outputting the navigation notification signal are provided. Luke regardless whether, it is possible to share the circuit for outputting a test signal indicating the result of the game against IF1 substrate 1100 in the gaming control board 40.

  In the first embodiment, the display signal and the navigation-in-progress signal are input to the second information output circuit 40b, and the conversion circuit in the second information output circuit 40b extracts only the information related to the navigation notification from the display signal to output the navigation notification signal. Although the navigation notification signal is generated and transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200, the main control unit 41 directly generates a signal including only the information related to the navigation notification, A signal may be input to the second information output circuit 40b to be transmitted from the second information output circuit 40b to the IF2 board 1200.

  In addition, it is also possible to use all or part of the data of the first internal winning command, the second internal winning command, and the push-order command transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 and output it as a navigation notification signal. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to generate a signal only for outputting the navigation notification signal. As such a configuration, for example, the main control unit 41 is configured to be able to transmit a push-order command to the IF2 control unit 1203, and the IF2 control unit 1203 identifies the navigation number based on the push-order command and The stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped in accordance with the navigation number, and the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the corresponding design pattern of the stop reel can be drawn is output. It may be configured to.

  In the first embodiment, the lighting modes for turning on the display devices 12L and 12R by the navigation notification are the first to the third stop mode because the display devices 12L and 12R are turned on by one lighting mode when the notification target winning combination is won. All the stop orders up to the stop can be specified, and a drive signal for lighting the indicators 12L and 12R in the lighting mode is branched and transmitted to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. With respect to the lighting mode in which the indicators 12L, 12R are lit by the notification, after indicating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be stopped next, the stop order can be sequentially specified by switching the lighting mode each time the stop operation is performed. In such a configuration, a signal capable of specifying all the stop orders from the first stop to the third stop when the notification target combination is won. It is preferable that the main control unit 41 generates the data and transmits it to the test apparatus 1300 via the IF2 board 1200. This allows the test apparatus 1300 side to notify the stop notified by the navigation notification at an earlier stage. It is possible to specify the order.

  In the first embodiment, as the navigation notification, the stop operation mode (stop order or stop operation timing) that is advantageous to the player is notified, but as the effect, the advantage degree to the player does not change, but it is predetermined. The navigation notification for performing the reel stop operation in the stop operation mode may be performed. As such a configuration, for example, as one re-game combination in which a prize is awarded and a re-game is given regardless of the stop order, operations are performed in one stop order (for example, right-middle-left stop order). 1 symbol combination (for example, "red 7-red 7-red 7") is stopped, and the stop operation is performed in another stop order (for example, left middle right stop order), the first symbol In a configuration in which a combination of symbols different from the combination of (for example, “Replay-Replay-Replay”) is stopped, when the main control unit 41 side decides to stop the first combination of symbols as an effect, , A navigation number indicating one stop order is output, and when it is determined not to stop the combination of the first symbols, a navigation number indicating the other stop order is output, thereby producing the first effect. When you stop the combination of symbols of 1, The F2 control unit 1203 specifies the navigation number based on the push order command, outputs stop reel designation signals in the order in which the reels are stopped in accordance with the navigation number, and outputs the corresponding stop reels in accordance with the navigation number. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position at which the configuration pattern can be pulled in, it is possible to perform the stop operation close to the slot machine on the market even by the test by the test device 1300.

  Further, with such a configuration, for example, on the condition that the combination of the first symbols is stopped, a configuration in which the degree of advantage after the next game is changed (the combination of the first symbols is stopped It is a configuration that shifts to a predetermined gaming state or the combination of the first symbols is stopped, so that the number of games controlled by the AT is added), and the first symbol combination by the navigation number Even in a configuration in which the player is instructed to perform a stop operation mode for stopping, a stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped according to the navigation number, and the corresponding stop reel is configured according to the navigation number. By outputting the stop execution position signal indicating the stop operation position where the symbol can be drawn in, a payout rate close to the market payout rate can be obtained by the test by the test device 1300.

  Further, with such a configuration, for example, a combination of the same degree of advantage (for example, replay), a combination of the first symbol and a combination of the second symbol In the case of winning in the internal lottery, a stop operation mode in which the combination of the first symbols can be won in order to simply stop the combination of the first symbols on the reels as an effect is shown. When outputting the navigation number, the stop operation position where the stop reel designation signal is output in the order in which the reels are stopped in accordance with the navigation number, and the configuration pattern corresponding to the navigation number can be drawn for the corresponding stop reel. By outputting a stop execution position signal indicating that the reel is stopped in a content close to the content of the stop mode of the reel stopped in the slot machine on the market by the test by the test apparatus 1300. It can be.

[Display Control of Gaming Machine Information Display 50]
When initializing the data determined to be abnormal and the data related to the data, for example, at least one of the advantageous section ratio, the combination winning payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio for the past 6000 games. If any one of them is determined to be abnormal, the data regarding all of them may be initialized, or only a part of the data may be initialized. Further, when it is determined that a part of the data for the past 6000 games is abnormal, all the data for the past 6000 games and the total cumulative game number are initialized, or conversely, a part of the data for the total cumulative game number is initialized. When it is determined that the abnormality has occurred, all the data for the past 6000 games and for the total cumulative number of games may be initialized.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not the data used for calculating the advantageous section ratio, the combination winning payout ratio, the accessory payout ratio, and the advantageous section payout ratio between the past 6000 games and the total cumulative number of games are normal, and it is judged as abnormal. In that case, a notification to that effect is given, and then a predetermined operation (for example, the switches such as the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the setting key switch 37 are operated in a predetermined procedure). By doing so, initialization regarding the data may be performed.

  In addition, in the notification that the abnormality is determined, as described above, even if the gaming machine information display 50 is made to display that the abnormality has been detected (for example, “FFFF”), and that notification is made. When the abnormality is determined, a command that can specify that fact is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 so that the sub-control unit 91 informs that the abnormality is determined by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total cumulative number of games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the past 6000 games during the period after the power is turned on until the power supply is stopped. The ratio of bonuses paid out, the ratio of advantaged section payouts between the past 6000 games, the ratio of combined payouts to the total accumulated payouts, the ratio of accessory payouts to the total accumulated payouts, and the ratio of advantageous section payouts to the total accumulated payouts for each predetermined period. However, it is displayed only when the open state of the front door 1b is detected, or the operation of a predetermined operation switch (for example, the reset / setting switch 38) is detected. Is displayed only when the game is on, displayed when the game is not in progress, and displayed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Or Unishi may or to appear after the power is turned on only for a predetermined period. Further, the display content may be switched each time a predetermined operation is performed, instead of being automatically switched every predetermined period.

  In the first embodiment, the abnormality in the data used for calculating the display content of the gaming machine information display 50 is determined, and the period for which the data for calculating the display content is insufficient is the gaming machine information display. Although it is configured to be notified using 50, a command capable of specifying that fact may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 so that it can be confirmed by a display device or an effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91.

  In the first embodiment, the advantageous section ratio between the past 6000 games, the advantageous section ratio to the total number of cumulative games, the combination payout ratio between the past 6000 games, the bonus payout ratio between the past 6000 games, and the advantageous section between the past 6000 games. The payout ratio, the combination winning payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount, the accessory payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount, and the advantageous section payout ratio with respect to the total cumulative payout amount are displayed on the gaming machine information display 50. In addition to the display of, the RAM 41c is initialized by changing the setting, and when the wiring (wiring of the backup power supply or the like) provided in the slot machine 1 is detected, the contents can be recognized. It may be displayed on the gaming machine information display 50.

  In particular, if the setting is changed during the bonus, the advantageous section or the carryover of the bonus and the bonus or the advantageous section is forcibly ended, or the bonus during the carryover is cleared, the game is defined as the carryover of the bonus. It was done more than a few times, or the operation to intentionally end the advantageous section was performed (for example, in RT2, RT3 during AT, intentionally winning RT1 replay game or SB, stopping specific symbol) When an operation to shift to RT1 is performed, that is, when a player intentionally shifts from a relatively advantageous gaming state to an unfavorable gaming state), and the gaming machine information display 50 is disconnected. When it is detected that there is a possibility that the connection is not normally established due to the occurrence of such problems, the fact is notified so that it can be specified. By doing so, it is possible to recognize that there has been a possibility that an illegal operation has been performed so that correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination winning payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. is not displayed. .

  If there is a possibility that an illegal operation was performed such that the correct information such as the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. is not displayed, the fact is detected and the detection is performed. Is recorded on the side of the main control unit 41, and a predetermined operation (for example, a switch such as the start switch 7 or the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the setting key switch 37, etc. is predetermined without being notified at the time of detection). By operating in the procedure of (1), connecting a predetermined external device such as an inspection terminal to the game control board 40, etc.), these histories are displayed on the display unit provided on the main control unit 41 side ( For example, it can be confirmed by a gaming machine information display device 50 or the like), a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device 51 or the like) provided on the sub-control unit 91 side, a display device outside the slot machine 1, or the like. It may be.

  Also, the setting is changed, the disconnection is detected, and the connection failure of the gaming machine information display 50 occurs, so that the advantageous section ratio, the accessory payout ratio, the combination winning payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. are correct. There is a possibility that information may not be displayed, and as described above, it may have been illegally operated so that correct information may not be displayed as the advantageous section ratio, accessory payout ratio, combination payout ratio, advantageous section payout ratio, etc. This may be confirmed by a display device or an effect device controlled by the sub control unit 91. Also, during the bonus, during the advantageous section or during the carryover of the bonus, the setting was changed and the bonus or the advantageous section was forcibly ended, the bonus during carryover was cleared, the advantageous section ratio, the duty payout ratio, The sub-control unit 91 records the history of the fact that it may have been operated illegally so that correct information may not be displayed as the combination payout ratio, the advantageous section payout ratio, etc. The history of may be confirmed.

[About production and notification]
In the above-described example, the example in which the liquid crystal display 51 is used to give an effect or notification is given, but for example, the speakers 53, 54 and the back lamp (reel LED 55 of the above embodiment) arranged on the rear side (inner side) of the reel. ), A transmissive liquid crystal display arranged on the front side of the reel (a liquid crystal display configured so that the reel can be seen), lamps and LEDs mounted on the front door 1b, etc., vibration of the stop switch, surroundings of the stop switch The effect may be executed by means different from those of the above-described embodiment, such as blowing air from the device or changing the temperature of the stop switch.

[About AT]
In the example of the above slot machine, the example in which the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT has been described, but the AT control executed by the main control unit 41 includes the execution of the AT lottery. The AT lottery may include determination of winning or non-winning of the AT lottery, determination of whether to stock the AT game number, determination of the AT game number, addition lottery of the AT game number, and the like. Further, as the control related to the AT, control of the high probability state of the AT lottery can be mentioned. The control of the high probability state of the AT lottery is such that the probability of winning the AT lottery becomes high, the control of shortening the period until the AT is controlled according to the result of the internal lottery, the probability of winning the additional lottery and the game. Includes controls that favor numbers. Further, as the control related to the AT, it is possible to control to the AT when the prescribed number of games are exhausted. The time when the number of games of the prescribed number of games is exhausted includes the time of reaching the number of ceiling games and the time of reaching the number of games determined by lottery. Further, as the control related to the AT, there is a control for setting a precursory period. The control for setting the aura period includes control for executing effects of, for example, 0 to 32 games during the aura period before the start of AT. Further, as the control related to the AT, there is a control for giving a penalty. The control for giving a penalty includes determination of a penalty content, determination or setting of a penalty period. In addition, as the control related to the AT, the main control unit 41 may perform lighting control of a lamp or an LED indicating that the AT is in progress.

  In addition, as the control related to the AT, the main control unit 41 performs lighting control of a lamp and an LED for executing a navigation effect. Further, the sub control unit 91 may execute the navigation effect in synchronization with the main control unit 41 executing the navigation effect. Further, when the lottery probability is improved, for example, when the AT control is controlled to a high probability state, the main control unit 41 notifies the fact by lighting control of a lamp or an LED (for example, the game auxiliary display 12 or the like). You may do it. More specifically, the main control unit 41 may notify the fact that the navigation effect is executed a predetermined number of times by the game auxiliary display device 12 to control to the high probability state of AT lottery. Alternatively, the main control unit 41 may notify the sub-control unit 91 that the navigation effect is controlled a predetermined number of times to control to the high probability state of AT lottery.

  In addition, when the main control unit 41 executes the control related to the AT, it is preferable that the processing of the main control unit 41 is executed by a control unit that is subordinate to the main control unit 41 and is a subordinate of the main control unit 41. .. For example, the reel stop control may be executed by a controller provided on a board other than the game control board, and the main controller 41 may transfer the operation signal of the stop switch to the controller. In this way, by causing the lower-level control unit to control the main control unit 41, it is possible to prevent the capacity shortage of the ROM 41b and the RAM 41c and the shortage of the processing capacity of the main CPU 41a when the control related to the AT is performed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes the above-described control related to the AT, but the sub-control unit 91 may execute it. The sub-control unit 91 performs, for example, AT lottery processing or additional lottery processing based on an internal winning command from the main control unit 41, and executes processing for controlling to AT or navigation performance according to the result. You may make it process.

[Setting change status and setting confirmation status]
Regarding the setting change state, it may be possible to shift to the setting change state on condition that “power supply ON” + “setting key switch ON” + “front door open detection”. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting changes while the front door is not open. In addition, once the setting change status is entered, the setting change status is maintained regardless of whether the front door is open or closed until the end condition for ending the setting change status (the setting key switch is turned off after the set value is confirmed) is satisfied. You may do so. As a result, even if the front door is closed during the setting change state, the setting change state is not ended, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting change state again.

  Further, with respect to the setting confirmation state, it may be possible to shift to the setting confirmation state on condition that “setting key switch ON” + “front door open detection”. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation when the front door is not opened. Also, once the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting confirmation state is maintained regardless of the open / closed state of the front door until the end condition (setting key switch OFF operation) for ending the setting confirmation state is satisfied. Good. As a result, even if the front door is closed during the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is not ended, so that it is possible to prevent the trouble of shifting to the setting confirmation state again.

  The embodiments and examples disclosed this time are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include meanings equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

  1 slot machine, 2L, 2C, 2R reels, 6 MAXBET switch, 7 start switch, 8L, 8C, 8R stop switch, 41 main control section, 91 sub control section.

Claims (1)

Equipped with a variable display unit that can variably display multiple types of identification information, each of which can be identified,
After variably displaying the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the display result,
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result,
A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A game display unit which is controlled by the game control unit and displays a plurality of types of predetermined information including information capable of specifying the operation mode of the derivation operation unit,
Delay control means for performing delay control for delaying the progress of the game over the delay period,
And a post-determination processing unit that executes post-determination processing according to the determination result of whether or not a winning has occurred,
When the delay control is not performed when the derivation operation means is operated according to the operation mode displayed on the game display means, the display of the game display means is changed after the post-determination processing is executed,
When the delay control is performed when the derivation operation means is operated in accordance with the operation mode displayed on the game display means, the display of the operation mode displayed on the game display means is maintained during the delay period. A slot machine in which the display of the game display means is changed after the delay period has elapsed.

Images